Integra Stereo Receiver DTR 88 User Manual

AV Receiver  
DTR-8.8  
Instruction Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use  
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-  
out the permission of the copyright holder.  
For U.S. models  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact  
the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.  
The user changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all  
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft  
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-  
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards  
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-  
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because  
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-  
tering.  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-  
ence in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-  
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-  
ference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
4. Power  
WARNING  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-  
TION CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.  
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the  
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel  
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit  
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug  
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Pressing the [Standby/On] button to select Standby  
mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If you do not  
intend to use the unit for an extended period,  
remove the power cord from the AC outlet.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-  
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-  
cian for help.  
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands  
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets  
inside this unit, have it checked by the dealer from  
whom you purchased this unit.  
For Canadian Models  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
6. Handling Notes  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-  
nally bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit  
for a long time, because they may leave marks on  
the case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm  
after prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may  
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so  
be sure to use it occasionally.  
Modèle pour les Canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-  
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-  
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiroom Capability ........................................ 8  
Changing the Input Display ..................................52  
Analog Input Setup ...............................................53  
(not North American models) .............................60  
Playing Your AV Components ......................62  
Listening to AM/FM Stations ...............................63  
®
®
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna ...................... 27  
Using the Re-EQ Function ....................................86  
Connecting a TV or Projector ............................... 32  
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial  
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV  
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc,  
Connecting an External Controller ....................... 44  
Source Format ....................................................89  
About the Listening Modes ...................................93  
Recording the Input Source ..................................95  
Recording from Different AV Sources .................95  
Onscreen Setup Menus .................................96  
Menu Map .............................................................96  
Adjusting the Listening Modes .....................97  
Audio Adjust .........................................................97  
Listening Mode Presets .........................................99  
Connecting Integra/Onkyo  
Components ....... 45  
Connecting the Power Cord .................................. 45  
Turning On the AV Receiver ......................... 46  
Turning On and Standby ....................................... 46  
First Time Setup ............................................. 47  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
®
Powered Zone 2 Setting ......................................126  
Resetting the Remote Controller .........................133  
Learning Commands ...........................................135  
Using Macros ......................................................136  
Troubleshooting ...........................................137  
Specifications ...............................................141  
If you can’t resolve an issue, try resetting the AV  
receiver by holding down the [VCR/DVR] button  
and pressing the [Standby/On] button.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
*10  
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)  
Amplifier  
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.  
• 7-channel amplifier  
*11  
• HD Radio reception (N. America only)  
• 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8  
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,  
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%  
(FTC)  
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. American model)  
• 40 AM/FM presets (other models)  
• AM/FM auto tuning  
• RDS radio data  
• Direct tuning  
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• Powered Zone 2 capability  
• Bi-amp and bridging capability for front speakers  
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)  
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all  
Others  
*1  
• Network-ready for playing music files on a networked  
computer or media server, or for listening to Internet  
radio  
channels  
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) trans-  
former  
• USB port for playing music files on USB mass storage  
devices (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players)  
• Supports MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A file formats  
Processing  
*12  
*1  
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction  
• THX Surround EX  
*2  
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus  
• IR IN A/B and OUT  
• THX Ultra2 certified  
*3  
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital  
• 12V TRIGGER OUT A, B, C  
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other  
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions  
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
• DTS , DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD  
*4  
MasterAudio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,  
DTS Neo:6  
*5  
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural  
*1  
*6  
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound  
VLSC and the VLSC logo are registered trademarks of Onkyo  
Corporation.  
• DSD Direct  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters  
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing  
• Re-EQ function  
*2  
*7  
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)  
• 15-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer  
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-  
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX  
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.  
Audio/Video  
*3  
• Zone 2 with level, tone, balance, and left, right, and  
subwoofer pre outs, and composite video output, and  
component video output (assignable).  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and left, right, and sub-  
woofer pre outs  
*4  
*8  
• 4 HDMI inputs, 2 outputs (Version 1.3a)  
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,  
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)  
• Component video upconversion of composite video  
and S-Video sources  
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc., and “DTS-HD  
Master Audio” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
*5  
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-  
ite video conversion  
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)  
• 3 component video inputs, 2 outputs  
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs  
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-  
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-  
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
*6  
• RS-232 control  
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.  
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input  
• 7.1-channel pre out  
*7 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX  
Ltd.  
*8  
Tuner  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-  
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-  
ing, LLC.  
*9  
• XM Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)  
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplied Accessories  
Features—Continued  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
*9  
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005  
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
*10  
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,  
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks  
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.Available only in the contiguous  
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)  
*11  
HD RadioTechnology Manufactured Under License From  
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD  
Radio” and “HD” Symbols are registered trademarks of iBiq-  
uity Digital Corporation. “HD Radio” is a trademark of iBiq-  
uity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.  
Speaker setup microphone  
Indoor FM antenna  
*12  
Manufactured under license fromAudyssey Laboratories. U.S.  
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-  
mark of Audyssey Laboratories.  
THX Ultra2  
AM loop antenna  
Before any home theater component can be THX Ultra2  
certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and per-  
formance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX  
Ultra2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home The-  
ater products you purchase will give you superb perfor-  
mance for many years to come. THX Ultra2 requirements  
define hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier  
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and opera-  
tion for both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2  
receivers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,  
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie  
Power cord  
(Power cord varies from country to country.)  
soundtracks for home theater playback.  
1
*
*
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.  
2
3
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Speaker Cable  
*
*
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corpora-  
tion.  
Speaker cable labels  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Mobile, Windows Media,  
ActiveSync, DirectX, and Internet Explorer are either regis-  
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and/or other countries.  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product  
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same  
regardless of color.  
*
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission  
from Microsoft Corporation.  
*
*
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.  
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-  
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright protection technol-  
ogy must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and  
is intended for home and other limited consumer uses  
only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multiroom Capability  
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels) in  
your main listening room, a stereo speaker system in a second room, or Zone 2, as we call it, and another stereo  
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3. And, you can select a different audio source for each room.  
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 22–26).  
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (see pages 88–94).  
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 124).  
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback and video playback (see page 124).  
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 125).  
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
*External power amplifier required.  
Main Room  
Surround back left and right  
speakers  
Front left and right speakers  
*While Powered Zone 2 is being  
used, nothing is output by these  
speakers (page 126).  
Subwoofer  
Center speaker  
Surround left and right speakers  
Zone 2 Room  
Zone 3 Room  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver  
Front Panel  
North American model  
1 2 456  
7 8 9J K L MN  
O
P
Q RSTU  
V
W
XY  
Z
Other models  
J
3
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.  
The page numbers in parentheses show where you can find the main explanation for each item.  
A Standby/On button (46)  
C Ready indicator (114)  
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.  
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.  
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and  
HDMI Power Control is enabled.  
B Standby indicator (46)  
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and  
flashes while a signal is being received from the  
remote controller.  
D Zone 2 indicator (128)  
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when  
Zone 2 is on.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
E Zone 3 indicator (128)  
Zone 3 is on.  
R Phones jack (84)  
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-  
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.  
F Remote-control sensor (15)  
S HDMI Out (49)  
Receives control signals from the remote controller.  
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.  
G Stereo button (88)  
T USB port  
A USB mass storage device, such as a USB flash  
drive or MP3 player, containing music files (MP3,  
WMA, WAV, M4A) can be plugged in here and the  
music selected and played through the AV receiver.  
H Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons (88)  
Select the listening modes.  
I Display  
U Audio Selector button (85)  
multichannel.  
See “Display” on page 11.  
Adjusts the display brightness.  
V Tone, Plus [+], and Minus [–] buttons (87,  
129)  
On models other than the North American model,  
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with  
North American model)” on page 65.  
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble), and the  
volume and balance of Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
W Input selector buttons (62)  
K Memory button (82)  
Select the following input sources: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, Game/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,  
L Tuning Mode button (63)  
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM  
and FM radio.  
X Return button  
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup  
menu.  
M Display button (84)  
Displays various information about the currently  
selected input source.  
Y Setup Mic (55)  
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects  
here.  
N Setup button  
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which  
are displayed on the connected TV.  
Z AUX 2 Input (41, 95)  
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so  
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,  
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.  
O Tuning, Preset, Arrow, and Enter buttons  
When AM or FM is selected, the Tuning [ ] [  
buttons are used for radio tuning, and the Preset  
]
[
(see page 82). With the onscreen setup menus, they  
work as arrow buttons and are used to select and set  
items. The Enter button is also used with the  
onscreen setup menus.  
P Master Volume control (62)  
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –dB,  
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-  
play).  
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-  
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 111.  
Q Zone 2, Zone 3, Level [ ]/[ ], and Off  
buttons (128, 129)  
The Zone 2 button is used when setting Zone 2.  
The Zone 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.  
The Level Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons are used  
when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or  
Zone 3.  
The Off button is used to turn off Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
Display  
1 234  
5 6  
7 8  
9
0 A B  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
AUTO (63): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is  
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-  
ual Tuning mode is selected.  
1Speaker/channel indicators  
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels  
used by the current input source.  
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set  
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for  
speakers that are set to No or None.  
tion.  
reo FM station.  
The following abbreviations indicate which audio  
channels are included in the current input signal.  
6SLEEP indicator (84)  
FL: Front left  
C: Center  
FR: Front right  
SL: Surround left  
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)  
SR: Surround right  
SBL: Surround back left  
SB: Surround back  
SBR: Surround back right  
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.  
7Audyssey indicator (55)  
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.  
8Headphone indicator (84)  
into the PHONES jack.  
9Message area  
Displays various information.  
0Audio input indicators (67, 85)  
Indicate the type of audio input that’s selected as the  
audio source: NETWORK, HDMI, USB, ANA-  
LOG, or DIGITAL.  
2BTL indicator (page 47)  
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to  
BTL for bridged front speaker operation.  
3ZONE 2 indicator (page 128)  
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being  
received, the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an  
the ANALOG indicator lights up.  
4Listening mode and format indicators (88)  
Show the selected listening mode and audio input  
signal format.  
AVolume level (62)  
5Tuning indicators (63)  
Displays the volume level.  
HD (North American model only) (67): Lights  
up if the current AM or FM station supports HD  
Radio technology.  
BMUTING indicator (83)  
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.  
SPS (North American model only) (68):  
Lights up when tuned to a HD Radio station that’s  
transmitting secondary multicast channels.  
RDS (not North American model) (65):  
Lights up when tuned to a radio station that supports  
RDS (Radio Data System).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
Rear Panel  
North American model  
89  
L
1 2 3 4 5  
67  
J
N O P  
Q
R
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
XM  
1
RS232  
MAIN  
HD RADIO  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
SIRIUS  
2
3
2
1
AM  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
DVD  
IR  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
ANTENNA  
V
V
B
C
AC OUTLET  
CB/PB  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
FM  
75  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
OUT  
A
B
S
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
120W 1A MAX.  
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
MULTI CH  
PRE OUT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
SURR L  
FRONT L  
ZONE2 L  
OUT  
(BTL)  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
FRONT  
L
g
S T U  
V W X Y Za b c d  
e
f
h
Other models  
K
M
HDMI  
AC INLET  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
IR  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CB/PB  
CR/PR  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
SW  
L
S
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
MULTI CH  
PRE OUT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
ZONE2 L  
SURR L  
FRONT L  
OUT  
(BTL)  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
FRONT  
L
B RS232  
A
REMOTE CONTROL  
(Remote Interactive) jack can be con-  
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home  
automation equipment and external controllers.  
This  
nected to the  
jack on another  
-capable Inte-  
gra/Onkyo component for remote and system  
control.  
C PHONO IN  
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.  
To use  
, you must make an analog audio connec-  
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other  
component, even if they are connected digitally.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3  
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-  
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which  
means you can assign each one to an input selector  
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input  
Setup” on page 51.  
O 12V TRIGGER OUT (A/B/C)  
ger inputs on other components.  
P ETHERNET  
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to your  
Ethernet network (e.g., router or switch) for playing  
music files on a networked computer or media  
server, or for listening to Internet radio.  
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1  
This RCA component video output is for connect-  
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.  
Q AM and FM ANTENNA (HD Radio) (on North  
American model)  
The AM push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna. The FM jack is for connecting an FM  
antenna.  
F COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/  
ZONE 2 OUT  
This RCA component video output is for connect-  
ing a TV or projector with a component video input  
located in your main listening room or Zone 2.  
R AC INLET  
The supplied power cord is connected here. The  
other end of the power cord should be connected to  
a suitable wall outlet.  
G HDMI IN 1–4, OUT MAIN, and OUT SUB  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-  
nections carry digital audio and digital video.  
S DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3  
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input  
Setup” on page 52.  
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD  
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re  
assignable, which means you can assign each one to  
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI  
Input Setup” on page 50.  
T DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT  
components with an optical digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input  
Setup” on page 52.  
The HDMI outputs are for connecting a TV or pro-  
jector with an HDMI input.  
H SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital  
antenna, sold separately (see page 74).  
I XM antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and  
Home Dock, sold separately (see page 69).  
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a  
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as  
a CD recorder.  
J MONITOR OUT  
U GND screw  
The S-Video or composite video jack should be  
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.  
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground  
wire.  
K AM ANTENNA (not North American model)  
These push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna.  
V CD IN  
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD  
player’s analog audio output.  
L ZONE 2 OUT  
W TAPE IN/OUT  
This composite video output can be connected to a  
video input on a TV in Zone 2.  
These analog audio input and output jacks are for  
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input and  
output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder, etc.  
M FM ANTENNA (not North American model)  
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.  
X AUX 1 IN  
A VCR for playback only or other video source can  
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite  
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.  
N IR IN A/B and OUT  
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-  
nected to the IR IN A or B jack, allowing you to  
control the AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or  
control it when it’s out of sight, for example,  
installed in a cabinet.  
Y GAME/TV IN  
A game console or TV output can be connected  
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input  
jacks for connecting the video signal.  
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-  
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)  
remote control signals through to other components.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
Z CBL/SAT IN  
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.  
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
a VCR/DVR IN/OUT  
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be  
connected here for recording and playback. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
b DVD IN  
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-  
necting the video signal.  
c FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR  
BACK L/R SPEAKERS  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal  
posts can be used with front speakers and surround  
back speakers, respectively, or used to bi-amp or  
bridge the front speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front  
Speakers” on page 25 and “Bridging the Front  
Speakers” on page 26.  
d MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER,  
SUBWOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK  
L/R  
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a  
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-  
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or  
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.  
e PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-  
WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R  
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can  
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-  
channel power amplifier for when you want to use  
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-  
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-  
woofer.  
f PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3  
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the  
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3. The  
SW jacks can be connected to the inputs on pow-  
ered subwoofers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
g ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS  
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in  
Zone 2.  
h AC OUTLET (North American model only)  
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply  
power to other AV components. The type and num-  
purchased your AV receiver.  
See pages 22–45 for hookup information.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller  
Installing the Batteries  
Using the Remote Controller  
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV  
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.  
To open the battery compartment, press  
the small hollow and slide open the cover.  
1
Remote control sensor  
Standby indicator  
AV receiver  
30˚  
30˚  
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)  
in accordance with the polarity diagram  
inside the battery compartment.  
2
Approx. 16 ft.  
(5 m)  
Notes:  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-  
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in  
mind when installing.  
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in  
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to  
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-  
ler may not work reliably.  
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,  
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be  
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass  
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.  
Slide the cover shut.  
3
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-  
cle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control  
sensor.  
Notes:  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try  
replacing the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long  
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from  
leakage or corrosion.  
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-  
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Remote Controller—Continued  
About the Remote Controller Modes  
Receiver/Tape Mode  
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote  
controller to control your other AV components. The  
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use  
with each type of component. Modes are selected by  
using the Remote Mode buttons.  
Receiver/Tape mode is used to control the AV receiver.  
It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette recorder  
connected via  
.
To set the remote controller to Receiver/Tape mode,  
press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button.  
Receiver/Tape Mode  
In Receiver/Tape mode, you can control the AV receiver  
and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via  
.
A
On  
Standby  
DVD Mode  
TV  
B
C
Input  
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo DVD  
player in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote  
control code, you can control components made by other  
manufacturers (see page 132).  
L
M
DVD  
1
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
CD/CDR/MD Mode  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
By default, you can control an Integra/Onkyo CD player  
in this mode. By entering the appropriate remote control  
code, you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD  
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 132).  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
D
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Dock Mode  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Receiver  
N
O
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo  
RI Dock. By default, you can control an RI Dock that has  
a remote control sensor, such as the DS-A2. To control  
Net/USB  
Tape/AMP  
Dimmer  
5
F
, you must enter the  
+
appropriate remote control code first (see page 132).  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
G
P
TV and VCR Modes  
-
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You  
page 132).  
H
I
Q
R
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Cable/SAT Mode  
1
In Cable/SAT mode, you can control a cable or satellite  
TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote con-  
trol code first (see page 132).  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Net/USB Mode  
J
K
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or  
for listening to Internet radio.  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
S
T
Zone 2/Zone 3 Modes  
VCR  
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see  
page 128).  
RC-688M  
U
Use the Remote Mode buttons to select a  
mode.  
1
Use the buttons supported by that mode  
2
Note:  
to control the component.  
Receiver/Tape mode: see right column  
DVD mode: see page 18  
• Some of the remote controller functions described in  
this manual may not work as expected with other com-  
ponents.  
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 19  
Dock mode: see page 20  
Net/USB mode: see page 21  
TV, VCR, Cable/SAT modes: see page 134  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote Controller—Continued  
T L Night button (86)  
Turns the Late Night function on or off.  
A Standby button (46)  
U Audio Sel button (85)  
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or  
multichannel.  
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.  
B On button (46)  
Turns on the AV receiver.  
C Input Selector buttons (62)  
TAPE mode  
Used to select the input source.  
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.  
1Previous and Next [  
The Previous [ ] button selects the previous  
track. During playback it selects the beginning of  
]/[  
] buttons  
D Macro buttons (136)  
Used with the Macro function.  
E Dimmer button (83)  
the current track. The Next [  
next track.  
] button selects the  
Adjusts the display brightness.  
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons  
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous  
and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-  
Used to select and adjust settings.  
G CH +/– button (82)  
erly with some cassette tapes.  
Selects radio presets.  
Play [ ] button  
H Setup button  
Starts playback.  
Used to change settings.  
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons  
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast  
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.  
I Display button (84)  
Displays information about the current input source.  
J Listening Mode buttons (88)  
Reverse Play [ ] button  
[Surround], and Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons  
can be used at any time, regardless of the currently  
selected remote controller mode.  
Starts reverse playback.  
Stop [ ] button  
Stops playback.  
Rec [ ] button  
Starts recording.  
K Test Tone, CH Sel, Level–, and Level+  
buttons (83, 105)  
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.  
L Light button  
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on  
or off.  
M D.TUN button (64)  
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.  
N Remote Mode buttons (16)  
Used to select the remote controller modes. When  
you press a button, the Remote Mode button for the  
currently selected mode lights up.  
O Sleep button (84)  
Used with the Sleep function.  
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (62)  
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of  
Q Return button  
tings.  
R Muting button (83)  
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.  
S Re-EQ button (86)  
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller—Continued  
A Standby button  
DVD Mode  
Sets the DVD player to Standby.  
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the  
[DVD] Remote Mode button.  
B On button  
Turns on the DVD player.  
C Number buttons  
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and  
to enter times for locating specific points.  
D Top Menu button  
Selects a DVD’s top menu.  
A
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
B
C
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
F Disc +/– button  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
Selects discs on a DVD changer.  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
G Setup button  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.  
TV VOL  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Phono  
H Display button  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Displays information about the current disc, title,  
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining  
time, total time, and so on.  
M
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
I Playback buttons  
CDR/MD/Dock  
DVD  
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,  
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow  
Forward.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
D
E
Dimmer  
N
J Repeat button  
+
Used with the repeat playback function.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
F
K Audio button  
-
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-  
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).  
O
G
H
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
L Open/Close [ ] button  
Opens and closes the disc tray.  
I
M Clear button  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
P
Listening Mode  
Surround  
N Menu button  
Stereo  
Displays a DVD’s menu.  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
J
K
Q
R
O Return button  
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
P Random button  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
L
VCR  
Used with the random playback function.  
S
RC-688M  
Q Play Mode button  
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
R Subtitle button  
Selects subtitles.  
S Video Off button  
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating  
any possibility of interference.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
A Standby button  
CD/MD/CDR Modes  
Sets the component to Standby.  
To control an Integra/Onkyo CD player, MD  
recorder, or CD recorder, or a CD or MD  
player/recorder made by another manufacturer,  
press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the  
CD/MD/CDR remote controller mode.  
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD  
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,  
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code  
(see page 132).  
B On button  
Set the component to On or Standby.  
C Number buttons  
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating  
specific points.  
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons  
Used with some components.  
E Disc +/– button  
Selects discs on a CD changer.  
F Display button  
Displays information about the current disc or track,  
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,  
and so on.  
A
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
B
C
G Playback buttons  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,  
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
H Rec [ ] button  
Starts recording.  
TV VOL  
Net/USB  
Phono  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
I Repeat button  
K
Input Selector  
Macro  
Used with the repeat playback function.  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
J Open/Close [ ] button  
Remote Mode  
CD  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.  
CDR/MD/Dock  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Net/USB  
K Clear button  
Dimmer  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
L Return button  
D
E
Used with some components.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
M Random button  
Used with the random playback function.  
-
Prev  
CH  
N Play Mode button  
F
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
Display  
Muting  
L
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
M
N
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
9
J
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
A Standby button  
Dock Mode  
Turns off the iPod.  
Dock mode is for controlling anApple iPod in an Onkyo  
RI Dock.  
B On button*  
Turns on the iPod.  
To control an RI Dock, press the [CD] REMOTE  
MODE button to select the Dock remote controller  
mode.  
In order to control an RI Dock, you must first enter the  
appropriate remote control code (see page 132).  
C Top Menu button  
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2  
RI Dock.  
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons*  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
When Using an RI Dock:  
Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV  
IN L/R jacks.  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or  
HDD/DOCK.  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see  
page 52).  
E Album +/– button*  
Selects the next or previous album.  
F Display button*  
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.  
G Previous [  
] button  
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the  
previous song.  
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more  
information.  
H Pause [ ] button  
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it  
works as a Play/Pause button.)  
A
On  
Standby  
TV  
I Rewind [ ] button  
Input  
B
Press and hold to rewind.  
DVD  
1
VCR/  
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
J Playlist [ ]/[ ] buttons*  
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the  
iPod.  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
K Repeat button*  
TV VOL  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Phono  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Used with the repeat function.  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
L Menu button*  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Used to access menus.  
Remote Mode  
CD  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
M Play [ ] button  
CDR/MD/Dock  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn  
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this  
button works as a Play/Pause button.)  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
C
4
L
N Next [  
] button  
+
Selects the next song.  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
5
6
O Stop [ ] button  
-
Stops playback and displays a menu.  
Prev  
CH  
P Fast Forward [ ] button  
M
Display  
Muting  
Press and hold to fast forward.  
N
O
P
Q
7
8
Q Random button*  
Used with the shuffle function.  
9
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
R Play Mode button  
J
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Used to select play modes on components with  
selectable play modes.  
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2  
RI Dock.  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
K
R
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported  
by 3rd generation iPods.  
VCR  
RC-688M  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
A Number buttons  
Net/USB Mode  
Used to enter track numbers.  
Net/USB mode is for playing music files on a networked  
computer, media server, or USB mass storage device, or  
for listening to Internet radio.  
B Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and Enter buttons  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
C CH +/– button  
To set the remote controller to Net/USB mode, press  
the [Net/USB] Remote Mode button.  
Used to select Internet radio stations.  
D Setup button  
Displays the URL input screen for Internet radio.  
E Previous [  
] button  
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the  
previous song.  
F Pause [ ] button  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Pauses playback of music stored on a USB mass  
storage device.  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
1
G Repeat button  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Used with the repeat playback function, which can  
be used with music files on a networked computer,  
media server, or USB mass storage device.  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
H Return button  
Input Selector  
Returns to the previous display.  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
I Play [ ] button  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Starts playback.  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Net/USB  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
J Next [  
] button  
Net/USB  
Selects the next song.  
Dimmer  
K Stop [ ] button  
2
Stops playback.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
L Random button  
3
4
Used with the random playback function, which can  
be used with music files on a networked computer,  
media server, or USB mass storage device.  
-
8
Prev  
CH  
9
Display  
Muting  
5
6
J
K
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
L
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
7
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Enjoying Home Theater  
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your  
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.  
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.  
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).  
Surround left and right speakers  
These speakers are used for precise  
sound positioning and to add realistic  
ambience.  
Front left and right speakers  
These output the main sound.Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid  
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at  
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so  
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.  
Position them at the sides of the lis-  
tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet  
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally  
they should be equally spaced from the  
listener.  
Center speaker  
This speaker enhances the front left  
and right speakers, making sound  
movements distinct and providing a  
full sound image. For movies it’s used  
mainly for dialog.  
Position it close to yourTV (preferably  
on top) facing forward at about ear  
level, or at the same height as the  
front left and right speakers.  
Subwoofer  
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of  
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.  
The volume and quality of the bass output  
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-  
tion, the shape of your listening room, and  
your listening position.In general, a good bass  
sound can be obtained by installing the sub-  
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way  
along the front wall, as shown.  
Surround back left and right speakers  
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital  
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround  
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound  
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-  
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet  
(60–100 cm) above ear level.  
Tip: To nd the best position for your sub-  
woofer, while playing a movie or some music  
with good bass, experiment by placing your  
subwoofer at various positions within the  
room and choose the  
one that provides  
the most satisfying  
results.  
Corner  
position  
1/3 of wall  
position  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer  
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUB-  
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-  
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re  
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.  
Speaker Configuration  
For the best surround-sound experience, you should con-  
nect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.  
The following table shows which channels you should  
use based on the number of speakers you have.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
Powered  
subwoofer  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Number of speakers:  
Front left  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
ZONE  
2
ZON  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
S
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR BACK  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
Front right  
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT L  
LINE INPUT  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
PRE OUT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR  
B
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
Bi-AM  
Center  
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround back*  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
LINE INPUT  
SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT  
Attaching the Speaker Labels  
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, use the SURR  
BACK L terminals.  
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are  
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)  
speaker terminals are all black.)  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-  
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.  
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you  
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-  
cally (see page 55) or manually (see page 101).  
Speaker terminal  
Front left, Zone 2 left  
Front right, Zone 2 right  
Center  
Color  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
Using Dipole Speakers  
Surround left  
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and  
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole  
speakers output the same sound in two directions.  
Surround right  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to  
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left  
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their  
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround  
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned  
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.  
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you  
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each  
speaker cable in accordance with the above table.All you  
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the  
corresponding speaker terminal.  
Normal speakers  
Dipole speakers  
1
TV/screen  
1
TV/screen  
4
2
3
4
2
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
6. Surround right speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Speaker Connection Precautions  
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
You can connect speakers with an impedance of  
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the  
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,  
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see  
page 47). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,  
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long  
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may  
be activated.  
• Be careful not to short the  
positive and negative wires.  
Doing so may damage the AV  
receiver.  
• Don’t connect more than one  
cable to each speaker termi-  
nal. Doing so may damage the  
AV receiver.  
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before  
making any connections.  
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect  
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,  
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-  
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound  
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.  
Connecting the Speaker Cables  
Strip about 5/8" (15  
mm) of insulation from  
the ends of the  
Fully insert the bare wire.  
5/8" (15 mm)  
1
3
speaker cables, and  
twist the bare wires  
tightly, as shown.  
Screw the terminal tight.  
4
Unscrew the terminal.  
2
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.  
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
Front left speaker  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ETHERNET  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
A
B
C
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
FRONT R  
SURR R  
CENTER  
SURR L  
FRONT L  
Bi-AMP  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
SW  
L
S
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
Surround back  
right speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Surround left  
speaker  
Surround back  
left speaker  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup  
Bi-amping the Front Speakers  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts  
can be used with front speakers and surround back  
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate  
tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that  
support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble  
performance.  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)  
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter  
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s  
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right  
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to  
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-  
2
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)  
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV  
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to  
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-  
minal.  
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-  
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the  
speakers’ woofer terminals.  
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections  
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must  
set the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-  
amping (see page 47).  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)  
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter  
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s  
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left  
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.  
Important:  
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure  
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’  
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.  
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-  
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)  
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV  
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to  
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-  
minal.  
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support  
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.  
HDMI  
AC INLET  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
RS232  
MAIN  
ETHERNET  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
IR  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
FRONT R  
FRONT L  
Woofer (low)  
Tweeter (high)  
Right speaker  
Left speaker  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Bridged Speaker Hookup  
Bridging the Front Speakers  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts  
can be used with front speakers and surround back  
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide  
almost double the output power for the front speakers.  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)  
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-  
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR  
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right  
speaker’s negative terminal.  
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive  
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re  
using a powered subwoofer).  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)  
2
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR  
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative  
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are  
not.  
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.  
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L  
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative  
terminal.  
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections  
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must  
set the Speaker Type setting to BTL to enable bridging  
(see page 47).  
Notes:  
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8  
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may  
seriously damage the AV receiver.  
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-  
ers can handle the additional power.  
HDMI  
AC INLET  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
A
B
C
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
ZONE2  
L
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
OUT  
(BTL)  
(BT)  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
L
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
FRONT R  
FRONT L  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
(BTL)  
FRONT L  
Right speaker  
Left speaker  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting Antennas  
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor  
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect  
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.  
Use thumbtacks or something similar to  
fix the FM antenna into position.  
2
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without  
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna  
to use the tuner.  
North American Model  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
AM antenna push terminals  
HD RADIO  
AM  
ANTENNA  
FM  
75  
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself  
when using thumbtacks.  
FM antenna jack  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead (see page 28).  
Other Models  
AM antenna push terminals  
ANTENNA  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna  
AM  
FM75  
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting  
the tabs into the base, as shown.  
1
FM antenna jack  
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna  
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
Connect both wires of the AM loop  
antenna to the AM push terminals, as  
shown.  
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so  
they can be connected either way around).  
2
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.  
1
North American Model  
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and  
that the push terminals are gripping the bare  
wires, not the insulation.  
FM  
Insert the plug fully  
75  
into the jack.  
Other Models  
FM75  
North American Model  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust  
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting Antennas—Continued  
Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter  
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV  
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-  
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as  
shown.  
Other Models  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
TV/FM antenna splitter  
To AV receiver  
To TV (or VCR)  
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust  
the position of theAM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna  
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from  
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power  
cords.  
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied  
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in  
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.  
North American Model  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-  
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 28).  
Outdoor antenna  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead.  
Other Models  
Outdoor antenna  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
North American  
model is shown  
FM  
75  
Notes:  
OutdoorAM antennas work best when installed horizon-  
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained  
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note  
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.  
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable  
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an  
attic or loft.  
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well  
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line  
of sight to your local FM transmitter.  
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with  
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.  
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-  
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.  
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated  
well away from power lines and other high-voltage  
equipment.  
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance  
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-  
ards.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components  
AV Connection Color Coding  
About AV Connections  
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,  
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-  
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).  
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and  
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to  
connect composite video inputs and outputs.  
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals  
supplied with your other AV components.  
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed  
and double-checked all AV connections.  
Optical Digital Jacks  
Analog audio  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type  
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and  
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Composite video  
(Yellow)  
(Yellow)  
Right!  
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical  
plug straight when inserting and removing.  
• Push plugs in all the way to make  
good connections (loose connections  
can cause noise or malfunctions).  
• To prevent interference, keep audio  
and video cables away from power  
cords and speaker cables.  
Wrong!  
AV Cables and Jacks  
Video  
Cable  
Jack  
Description  
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-  
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and  
offer the best picture and sound quality.  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Y
P
P
Y
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best  
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their  
component video jacks slightly differently.)  
Y
Component  
video cable  
B
R
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB  
P
R/PR  
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals and  
provides better picture quality than composite video.  
S
S-Video cable  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,  
and other video equipment.  
Composite  
video cable  
V
Audio  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the  
same as for coaxial.  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
Optical digital  
audio cable  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is the  
same as for optical.  
Coaxial digital  
audio cable  
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most common  
connection format for analog audio and can be found  
on virtually all AV components.  
L
Analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is  
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-  
channel analog audio output. Several standard analog  
audio cables can be used instead of a multichannel  
cable.  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
Multichannel  
analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH  
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver  
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you  
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.  
: Signal Flow  
Video  
Video  
Audio  
Audio  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
DVD player, etc.  
Speakers (see page 23 for hookup details)  
Which Connections Should I Use?  
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format  
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.  
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.  
Video Connection Formats  
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:  
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.  
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,  
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-  
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the  
HDMI Monitor Setting Set to Main or Sub  
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to Main or  
Sub (see page 48), video input signals flow  
through the AV receiver as shown, with com-  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
posite video, S-Video, and component video  
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI  
output. Use the Main or Sub setting if you  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT  
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, respectively, to  
your TV.  
IN  
AV receiver  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
input signals as they are.  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
TV, projector, etc.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No  
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see  
page 48), video input signals flow through the  
AV receiver as shown, with composite video  
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the  
component video output. Use this setting if  
you connect the AV receiver’s COMPO-  
NENTVIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or COM-  
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to your TV.  
AV receiver  
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video  
and S-Video is downconverted to composite  
video. Note that these conversions only apply  
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not  
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.  
MONITOR OUT  
S-Video  
Composite  
Component  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video pass through their respective input sig-  
nals as they are.  
TV, projector, etc.  
This signal flow also applies when the Monitor  
page 48).  
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting  
When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No  
(see page 48), if the Monitor Out Resolution  
setting is set to anything other than Through  
(see page 48), the video signal flow will be as  
shown here, with composite video and S-Video  
sources being upconverted for the component  
video output.  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
IN  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input  
signals are not output.  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
TV, projector, etc.  
Audio Connection Formats  
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV  
receiver by using any of the following audio  
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,  
analog multichannel, or HDMI.  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in  
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-  
ital input signals for analog line outputs and  
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-  
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are  
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.  
HDMI  
Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel  
AV receiver  
2
HDMI  
Optical  
Analog  
Note:  
1,  
3
3
• Net/USB sources are not output digitally.  
1
2
3
Depends on the HDMI Audio Out setting (see page 114).  
Only the front L/R channels are output.  
Net/USB sources are not output.  
*
*
*
MD recorder, etc.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a TV or Projector  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
TV  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1  
MONITOR OUT S  
Component video input  
S-Video input  
A
B
C
a
Better  
MONITOR OUT V  
Composite video input  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
c
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTEN
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
C
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
A
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
E  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
b
c
S
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI C
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
SURR R  
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
Connect one  
or the other  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite  
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see  
pages 35 and 37).  
Hint!  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a DVD player  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the  
main left and right outputs for connection  
.
a
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
DVD player  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1  
DVD IN S  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
Better  
DVD IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
DVD IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
c
ANTENNA  
AM  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
V
VCR/DVR  
OUT  
IR  
C
V
A
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
b
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SU
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
c
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
SURR R  
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
DVD player  
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a  
multichannel analog audio output, see page 34.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input  
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel  
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.  
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT  
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s  
SURR BACK L/R jacks.  
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 53. To  
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 85. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the  
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 114.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
RS232  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
F
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
7.1 ch  
5.1 ch  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
IR  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
A
IN  
B
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OUT  
A
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK 
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
SURR BACK  
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
L
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SUR
R
R
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
MULTI CH  
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
SURR  
BACK  
DVD player  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback  
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection. If you use  
A
B
C
connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and  
b
c
a
, or and .)  
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2  
VCR/DVR IN S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVR  
Picture quality  
Best  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
Better  
VCR/DVR IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
VCR/DVR IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
c
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTE
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
C
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
A
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OU
b
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
MULTI
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
c
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
VCR or DVR  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video  
A
B
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.  
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
Connection  
AV receiver  
VCR/DVR OUT S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVD recorder  
Picture quality  
Better  
S-Video input  
Composite video input  
Audio L/R input  
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V  
Standard  
VCR/DVR OUT L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital optical input  
b
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
B
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
V
V
A
IN  
B
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR
A
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
MULTI CH  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
b
L
R
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
VCR or DVR  
Notes:  
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.  
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect  
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and  
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.  
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your  
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the  
VCR/DVR OUTV jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via theVCR/DVR  
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be  
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source  
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Video source  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3  
CBL/SAT IN S  
A
B
C
a
Better  
CBL/SAT IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
CBL/SAT IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
b
c
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
C
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
V
V
A
IN  
B
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR B
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
b
c
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
MULTI CH  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
SURR R  
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Components with HDMI  
About HDMI  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital  
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,  
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can  
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital  
audio, or multichannel PCM).  
*1  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays  
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and  
displays, resulting in no picture.)  
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will  
display a picture.  
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:  
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a  
Supported Audio Formats  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)  
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS-HD Mas-  
ter Audio)  
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.  
About Copyright Protection  
*2  
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), a copy-protection system for digital  
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT  
MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.  
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.  
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel® for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed  
to protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.  
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel®, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open  
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and  
digital displays.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Making HDMI Connections  
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,  
projector, and so on.  
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 50.  
Video Signals  
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT  
SUB for display on your TV. Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the  
HDMI outputs. See “Video Connection Formats” on page 30 for more information.  
Audio Signals  
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV  
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI outputs, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see  
page 114).  
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio  
Hint!  
Out setting to On (see page 114), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.  
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV receiver’s speakers, set the HDMI  
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the  
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV  
receiver’s speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.  
Note:  
• When the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see page 114), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening  
through your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV  
receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s set-  
tings, or turn down the AV receiver’s volume.  
HDMI  
OUT  
HDMI  
IN  
TV  
DVD player  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN 1  
OUT  
MAIN  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
V
V
A
CB/PB  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SUR
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Game Console  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
a
and .)  
b
Connection  
AV receiver  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3  
GAME/TV IN S  
Signal flow  
Game console  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
Picture quality  
Best  
A
B
C
a
Better  
GAME/TV IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Standard  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTE
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
C
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
V
V
A
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
S
OU
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SUR
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
b
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
MULTI
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
A
L
R
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Game Console  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
Input  
b
a
Digital  
L
Audio  
Input  
R
Input  
Video  
Input  
S Video  
A
B
VIDEO  
OUT  
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
S VIDEO  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Camcorder, etc.  
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Camcorder  
AUX 2 Input S Video  
AUX 2 Input Video  
S-Video output  
A
B
a
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital optical output  
AUX 2 Input Audio-L/R  
AUX 2 Input Digital  
b
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a CD Player  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
a
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
COAXIAL  
IN 2  
V
b
c
V
A
IN  
B
C
IN  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
L
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
S
A
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
PHONO  
CD  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
OPTICAL  
IN 2  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
SURR  
R
SURR  
L
OUT  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Connect one or the other  
CD player  
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,  
b
c
use and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
CD  
CD IN L/R  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
Connecting a Turntable  
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a  
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-  
table.  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
A
B
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
OUT  
S
A
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK 
Notes:  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the  
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENT
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
i
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R  
R
IN
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-  
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.  
If this happens, disconnect it.  
OUT  
L
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-  
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head  
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the  
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV  
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.  
PHONO  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
L
You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-  
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono  
equalizer’s manual for details.  
R
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (  
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
d
IN  
a
COAXIAL  
b
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
IN 2  
RS232  
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
R
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
NE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
TAPE  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
c
(DVD)  
OPTICAL  
IN 2  
R/PR  
S
OUT  
SURR SURR BACK F
S
A
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
a
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
L
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
R
SURR  
R
SURR  
R
OPTICAL  
d
OUT  
TAPE  
L
R
L
R
Connect one  
or the other  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.  
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and  
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection  
.
d
Connection  
a
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder  
TAPE IN L/R  
TAPE OUT L/R  
Analog audio L/R output  
Analog audio L/R input  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Digital optical input  
b
c
d
Connecting a Power Amplifier  
MAIN  
SUB  
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and  
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp  
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the  
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered  
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER jack.  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
A
B
C
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
SW  
L
S
OUT  
S
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT L  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
SURR  
R
SURR  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
SURR BACK  
1. Subwoofer  
6. Surround right speaker  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT  
CENTER  
SR  
SURR BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
Power amplifier  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting an RI Dock  
IfYour iPod Supports Video:  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect  
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV  
IN V jack.  
IfYour iPod Doesn’t Support Video:  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.  
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)  
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)  
IN  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
GAME/TV  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
HDMI  
V
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
I
R
Y
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COONENT VIDEO  
IN IIN 1(DVD)  
V
2
3
REMOTE  
CB/PB  
1
GAME/TV  
CONTROL  
Y
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
V
CR/PR  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
S
IN  
CONTROL  
IN  
IN  
OT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
IN  
1
(DVD)  
L
CR/PR  
S
(CBL/SAT)  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
R
R
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
3
1
2
OPTICAL  
L
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
R
(CBL/SAT)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
GAME/TV  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
OUT  
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
OUT  
If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock  
• Connect its video output jack to the AV receiver’s  
GAME/TV IN S jack.  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before  
using the AV receiver’s remote controller for the first  
time (see page 132).  
Notes:  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an  
cable (see page 45).  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD or HDD/DOCK.  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 52).  
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American model only)  
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be used to connect  
AC INLET  
the power cords of other components that you intend to use with the AV  
receiver. These components can then be left turned on so that they turn on and  
off as and when the AV receiver is set to On or Standby.  
Caution:  
AC OUET  
AC 120V Hz  
SWIT
120W
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that you connect to the  
AC OUTLETS does not exceed the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).  
Note:  
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable (page 114), the AC outlets  
are on all the time regardless of whether the AV receiver is set to On or  
Standby, or Ready mode in this case, so any components connected to them  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
120W 1A MAX.  
cannot be turned on or off automatically.  
• Integra/Onkyo components connected via  
the AV receiver.  
should be connected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on  
Connecting an External Controller  
The AV receiver can be controlled externally by connecting an external controller. The controller can be connected to  
the AV receiver’s RS232 port or ETHERNET port. If a controller is connected to the ETHERNET port, in the Network  
settings (page 122), set the Control setting to Enable, and set the Port number as required.  
Refer to your controller’s instruction manual for details on which AV receiver functions can be controlled and operating  
information.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Integra/Onkyo  
Components  
Step 1: Make sure that each Integra/Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable  
(RCA).  
Step 2: Make the necessary  
connections (see illustration below).  
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 52).  
With  
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:  
Auto Power On/Standby  
When you start playback on a component connected via  
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components  
connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC  
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn  
OUTLET on the AV receiver.  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on a component connected via  
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as  
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the  
function selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.  
Remote Control  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other  
-capable Integra/Onkyo components.You must  
enter the appropriate remote control code first (see page 133). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV  
receiver and not the other component.  
Notes:  
IN  
• Use only  
cables for  
connections.  
cables  
L
are supplied with Integra/Onkyo players (DVD, CD,  
etc.).  
R
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
CD  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
MONITOR  
OUT  
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
A
B
C
• Some components have two  
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is  
for connecting additional -capable components.  
jacks. You can con-  
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
IN  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
FRONT  
S
S
OUT  
A
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK F
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)  
L
L
L
CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
-
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
R
OUT  
• Connect only Integra/Onkyo components to  
jacks. Connecting other manufacturer’s components  
may cause a malfunction.  
DVD  
e.g., CD player  
• Some components may not support all  
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Inte-  
gra/Onkyo components.  
functions.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
e.g., DVD player  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power  
On/Standby and Direct Change  
work.  
functions do not  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
Connecting the Power Cord  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.  
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.  
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.  
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment  
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On the AV Receiver  
• North American model  
• Other models  
Standby  
On  
Standby/On  
Standby/On  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Standby indicator  
Standby indicator  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Receiver  
Cable  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Turning On and Standby  
On the AV receiver, press the [Standby/On] button.  
Remote  
AV receiver  
controller  
On the remote controller, press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button, fol-  
lowed by the [On] button.  
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the Standby indicator goes off.  
Receiver  
or  
Pressing the remote controller’s [On] button again will turn on any components con-  
nected via  
.
On  
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [Standby/On] button, or press the remote con-  
troller’s [Standby] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent any  
loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume before  
you turn it off.  
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV  
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.  
Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!  
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 55.  
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 48.  
Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,  
Y
HDMI  
component video input, or digital audio input?  
COAXIAL  
PB  
Input Setup” on page 51, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 52 respec-  
PR  
OPTICAL  
tively.  
Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI  
OUT  
IN  
Dock?  
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 52.  
TAPE  
MD recorder, CD recorder,  
RI Dock  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
First Time Setup  
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.  
Speaker Settings  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select1. Speaker Set-  
tings,and then press [Enter].  
The Speaker Settings menu appears.  
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-  
Enter  
matic speaker setup again (see page 55).  
2-1.Speaker Settings  
Speaker Impedance  
Speakers Type  
6ohms  
Normal  
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Enter  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 6  
2–5  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Speaker  
]
-
4
5
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Impedance,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any  
speaker is 4 ohms or more but  
less than 6.  
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all  
speakers are between 6 and  
16 ohms.  
Enter  
Random  
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but  
less than 6, set the Speaker Impedance to 4 ohms.  
To use bi-amping or bridging, you must change the  
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see pages  
25 and 26.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectSpeakerType,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
Notes:  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to  
feed up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive  
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room.  
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-  
nected your front speakers  
normally.  
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-  
ume.  
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-  
nected your front speakers for  
bi-amped operation.  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be  
slightly different from what you see on your TV.  
BTL: Select this if you’ve con-  
nected your front speakers for  
bridged operation. The BTL  
indicator will appear on the  
display.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
]
2
Note:  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Enter  
Enter  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Time Setup—Continued  
HDMI Monitor Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press [Enter].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Enter  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “1. Monitor  
Out,and then press [Enter].  
The Monitor Out menu appears.  
]
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Enter  
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 6  
2–5  
1-1.Monitor Out  
+
CH  
HDMI Monitor  
Resolution  
Monitor Out2  
Yes  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Enter  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
ning Mode  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectHDMI Monitor,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
4
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
No: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1,  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2  
OUT, S MONITOR OUT, or  
V MONITOR OUT.  
Main: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT  
MAIN.  
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
If you connect your TV to a video output other than the  
HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI  
Monitor setting to No so that the onscreen setup menus  
are displayed and composite video and S-Video sources  
are upconverted and output by the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 and COMPONENTVIDEO  
MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT.  
Enter  
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB, set the HDMI Monitor setting to  
Main or Sub, respectively, so that the onscreen setup  
menus are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and  
component video sources are upconverted and output by  
the HDMI OUT MAIN or HDMI OUT SUB.  
You can specify the output resolution for the HDMI out-  
puts and COMPONENT VIDEO outputs and have the  
AV receiver upconvert the picture resolution as neces-  
sary to match the resolution supported by your TV.  
Note:  
• When Main or Sub is selected, the  
onscreen setup menus are output by  
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re  
not using the HDMI outputs and  
select Main or Sub by mistake and  
the menus disappear, press the AV  
receiver’s [HDMI Out] button so  
that “HDMI Monitor: No”  
appears on the display.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
• See page 30 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-  
tor setting affects the video signal flow through the AV  
receiver.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Resolution,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
5
Enter  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Through: Select this to pass video  
through the AV receiver at the  
same resolution and with no  
conversion (default).  
Auto: Select this to have the AV  
receiver automatically con-  
vert video at resolutions not  
supported by your TV. (Not  
available when the HDMI  
Monitor setting is set to No.)  
480p: Select this for 480p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary.  
Using the HDMI Out Button  
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No, Main,  
or Sub by using the [HDMI Out] button on the AV  
receiver.  
Enter  
1, 2  
720p: Select this for 720p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary.  
1080i: Select this for 1080i output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary.  
1080p: Select this for 1080p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary. (Not available when  
the HDMI Monitor setting is  
set to No.)  
Press the [HDMI Out] button.  
The current setting is displayed.  
1
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Monitor Out2,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
6
Press the [HDMI Out] button  
2
repeatedly to select:  
No: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to a video output other  
that the HDMI OUT MAIN  
or HDMI OUT SUB.  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Monitor: Select this if you’ve con-  
nected the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV  
or other component in your  
main room.  
Main: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT  
MAIN.  
Enter  
Zone 2: Select this if you’ve con-  
nected the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR  
Sub: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT to a TV  
in Zone 2.  
Note:  
• When Main or Sub is selected, the  
onscreen setup menus are output by  
only the HDMI outputs. If you’re  
not using the HDMI outputs and  
select Main or Sub by mistake and  
the menus disappear, press the AV  
receiver’s [HDMI Out] button so  
that “HDMI Monitor: No”  
appears on the display.  
When Monitor is selected, the COM-  
PONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs the same  
video as the COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR OUT 1.  
Notes:  
• If the video source contains information that restricts  
output at high-resolutions, 720p or 1080i content will  
not be converted.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select2. HDMI Input,”  
and then press [Enter].  
]
HDMI Input Setup  
3
4
Zone  
3
1
2
3
Remo
Enter  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD/Dock  
The HDMI Input menu appears.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
1-2.HDMI Input  
DVD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
-
AUX2  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you  
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and use the Left and Right  
]
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
IN1: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 1.  
IN2: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 2.  
IN3: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 3.  
IN4: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 4.  
- - -: Select this to upconvert and  
output composite video,  
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The  
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,  
TAPE, CD, PHONO.  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an  
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-  
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are  
Enter  
upconverted ( ) and output by the HDMI outputs. You  
*
can set this for each input selector by selecting the  
“- - -” option.  
S-Video, and component  
Composite video, S-Video,  
video sources from the HDMI  
OUT.  
component video  
HDMI  
IN  
( )  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
*
5
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
HDMI  
Notes:  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
input selector.  
Receiver  
For composite video, S-Video, and component  
video upconversion for the HDMI OUT MAIN or  
HDMI OUT SUB, the HDMI Monitor setting must  
be set to Main or Sub (see page 48). See page 30 for  
sion.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as  
explained here, the digital audio input for that input  
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.  
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 52.  
2
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press [Enter].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
Enter  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Enter  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Component Video Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press [Enter].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
Enter  
Inp
Macro  
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
Dimmer  
Enter  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
Display  
Muting  
buttons to select “3. Component  
Video Input,and then press  
[Enter].  
Enter  
t  
Random  
The Component Video Input menu  
appears.  
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player  
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.  
1-3.Component Video Input  
DVD  
IN1  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Enter  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
AUX2  
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-  
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,  
AUX 2, TAPE, CD, PHONO) are assigned to the “- - -”  
option.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and use the Left and Right  
]
4
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a  
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so  
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
IN1: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 1.  
verted ( ) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO  
*
MONITOR OUT 1 or 2. You can set this for each input  
selector by selecting the “- - -” option.  
IN2: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 2.  
Composite video, S-Video  
IN  
Component video  
Enter  
( )  
IN3: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 3.  
*
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video  
- - -: Select to output composite  
video and S-Video sources  
from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT.  
Component video  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Receiver  
5
Notes:  
For composite video and S-Video upconversion for  
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1 or  
2, the HDMI Monitor setting must be set to Main  
or Sub (see page 48). See page 30 for more informa-  
tion on video signal flow and upconversion.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow buttons.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Changing the Input Display  
Digital Input Setup  
If you connect an  
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc  
-- --- 10  
/
Input Sele
Macro  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT  
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for  
to work properly, you must change this setting.  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.  
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
1, 2  
1, 2  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
list  
Random  
Listening Mode  
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you  
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.  
Press the [Tape] or [Game/TV]  
input selector button so that  
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears  
on the display.  
1
2
These are the default assignments.  
Input selector  
DVD  
Audio input  
COAX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX 1  
or  
- - -  
AUX 2  
FRONT (Fixed)  
- - -  
Press and hold down the [Tape]  
or [Game/TV] input selector but-  
ton (about 3 seconds) to change  
the setting.  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
- - -  
OPT2  
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or  
DOCK.  
PHONO  
- - -  
or  
For the Tape input selector, the setting  
changes in this order:  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
TAPE MD CDR  
DOCK  
For the Game/TV input selector, the  
setting changes in this order:  
GAME/TV DOCK  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
Note:  
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press [Enter].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
• DOCK can be selected for the Tape input selector or  
Game/TV input selector, but not both at the same time.  
Enter  
Enter  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Time Setup—Continued  
Analog Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Digital  
]
3
Input,and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The Digital Input menu appears.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
1-4.Digital Input  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
DVD  
COAX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
---  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Enter  
AUX2  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
FRONT  
---  
---  
OPT2  
---  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Net/USB  
4
1
Dimmer  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and then use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
COAX1: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
Enter  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
COAXIAL IN 1.  
COAX2: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Enter  
COAXIAL IN 2.  
COAX3: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
ening Mode  
COAXIAL IN 3.  
OPT1: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
OPTICAL IN 1.  
OPT2: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog  
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an  
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD  
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the  
DVD input selector.  
OPTICAL IN 2.  
- - -: Select if the component is  
connected to an analog  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
input.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
Notes:  
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press [Enter].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
selector.  
Enter  
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is  
fixed at the “- - -” option.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in  
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 50, this input assign-  
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And  
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,  
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.  
Enter  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Picture Quality Menu  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “5. Analog  
Input,and then press [Enter].  
The Analog Input menu appears.  
]
3
The new “1–6. Picture Quality” item has been added to  
the “1. Input/Output Assign” menu. This menu and its  
settings can be accessed just like the other menus. The  
settings are explained below.  
Enter  
1-5.Analog Input  
Multich  
DVD  
Picture Mode  
DVD-Video disc content originates from either film  
(recorded at 24 frames per second) or video intended for  
TV (recorded at 30 frames per second). With the default  
Picture Mode setting of Auto, the AV receiver automati-  
cally detects the type of content and processes it accord-  
ingly to achieve the best picture quality. If the AV  
receiver detects the type of content incorrectly due to  
characteristics of the disc, you can select Video or Film  
manually.  
Enter  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor.  
You can assign the multichannel input  
to the following input selectors: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,  
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or  
PHONO.  
]
4
5
Enter  
Auto: The type of content is detected automati-  
cally and processed accordingly (default).  
Video: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc  
whose content originates from video.  
Film: Select when playing a DVD-Video disc  
whose content originates from film.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Edge Enhancement  
With Edge Enhancement, you can make the picture  
appear sharper.  
Off: Edge enhancement off (default).  
Low: Low edge enhancement.  
Medium: Medium edge enhancement.  
High: High edge enhancement.  
Notes:  
• To listen to the component connected to the multi-  
channel input, press the [Audio Selector] button  
repeatedly to select Multich (see page 85).  
Mosquito NR  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
With Mosquito Noise Reduction, you can remove the  
shimmering or haziness that sometimes appears around  
objects in the picture. Mosquito noise can be an issue  
with overly compressed MPEG content.  
Off: Mosquito noise reduction off (default).  
Low: Low mosquito noise reduction.  
Medium: Medium mosquito noise reduction.  
High: High mosquito noise reduction.  
Random NR  
With Random Noise Reduction, you can remove indis-  
criminate picture noise, such as film grain.  
Off: Random noise reduction off (default).  
Low: Low random noise reduction.  
Medium: Medium random noise reduction.  
High: High random noise reduction.  
Block NR  
With Block Noise Reduction, you can remove the block  
distortion that sometimes appears in the picture. Block  
noise can be an issue with overly compressed MPEG  
content.  
Off: Block noise reduction off (default).  
On: Block noise reduction on.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT  
Automatic Speaker Setup  
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)  
Notes:  
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey  
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-  
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances  
from the listening position and calculate the optimal  
speaker settings for you automatically.  
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the  
Speaker Impedance setting before running the  
automatic speaker setup (see page 47).  
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted  
automatically when the automatic speaker setup  
starts.  
Before using this function, connect and position all of  
your speakers.  
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed  
while a pair of headphones is connected.  
Measurement Positions  
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-  
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-  
surement time varies depending on the number of  
positions and speakers.  
To create a listening environment in which several  
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,  
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight  
positions within the listening area.  
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you  
want to cancel the setup.  
1st measurement position  
This is the center position of your listening area, or  
the listening position if there’s only one listener.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during  
the automatic speaker setup.  
2nd–8th measurement positions  
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the  
places where the other listeners will sit). You can  
measure up to eight positions.  
1
The following examples show some typical home theater  
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches  
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when  
prompted.  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
Setup Mic  
2, 9  
2
Remote
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Enter  
,
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
:
:
Listening area  
Listening position  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be  
slightly different from what you see on your TV.  
The speaker detect results  
appear.  
4
Auto Speaker Setup  
Enter  
Turn on the AV receiver and the  
connected TV.  
Next  
Retry  
Cancel  
1
On the TV, select the input to which the  
AV receiver is connected.  
:Yes  
:No  
Enter  
SP Detect Result  
Place the setup microphone at  
2
Yes” means that the speaker was  
detected. “No” means that no speaker  
was detected.  
the 1st measurement position,  
and connect it to the Setup Mic  
jack.  
If you agree with the results, use  
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select Next, and then  
press [Enter].  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
The options are:  
Please place microphone at center  
of listening area at ear height.  
Next: Proceed to the next step.  
Retry: Return to step 3 and try again.  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker  
setup.  
Notes:  
• Make sure the microphone is hori-  
zontal.  
• If there’s an obstacle between the  
microphone and any speaker, the  
automatic setup will not work cor-  
rectly. Set up the room as you would  
when enjoying a DVD movie.  
The following screen appears.  
5
Auto Speaker Setup  
Next  
• Positioning the microphone close to  
where your ears would normally be  
will provide the best results.You can  
set the height of the microphone by  
using a tripod or level table.  
Please place microphone at  
2nd Position at ear height.  
Place the setup microphone at  
the next position (see page 55),  
and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
Press [Enter].  
3
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more  
measurements. This takes a few min-  
utes.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Enter  
Do not unplug  
microphone.  
Please keep quiet.  
Now Measuring...  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Do not unplug  
microphone.  
Please keep quiet.  
Now Measuring...  
A test tone is output by each speaker in  
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-  
mines which speakers are connected.  
This takes a few minutes.  
When prompted, place the setup  
microphone at the next position,  
and repeat step 5.  
6
Notes:  
You can cancel the automatic speaker  
setup at any point in the procedure  
simply by disconnecting the setup  
microphone.  
• If any extraneous noise is picked up  
by the microphone, the automatic  
setup may not work correctly, so  
keep quiet.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
After the 3rd or 7th measurement, the  
following screen appears.  
Review SP Distance:Review the  
speaker distance settings (see  
“Reviewing the Results” on  
page 59).  
Review SP Level: Review the speaker  
levelsettings(seeReviewing  
the Results” on page 59).  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker  
setup.  
7
Auto Speaker Setup  
Enter  
Next  
finish(Calculate)  
Please select “Next”, when measuring  
next position, and select “finish”,  
when ending.  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
then press [Enter].  
Next: Select this if you want to mea-  
sure another listening posi-  
tion. After the 8th  
]
If you selected “Save,” the results are  
saved, and the following screen  
appears.  
10  
Auto Speaker Setup  
measurement has been taken,  
the procedure automatically  
proceeds to step 8.  
Saving...  
Finish(Calculate):Select this if you  
don’t want to measure any  
more listening positions and  
are ready to calculate the  
Disconnect the setup micro-  
phone.  
11  
results, then go to step 8.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
When the measurements are  
complete, the following screen  
appears.  
8
9
Please unplug microphone.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Note:  
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the  
Equalizer Settings (page 106) will be set to Audyssey.  
Calculating...  
When the calculations are com-  
plete, the following screen  
appears.  
Error Messages  
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following  
error messages may appear:  
Enter  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Save  
Ambient noise is too high  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Enter  
Retry  
Cancel  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select an option, and  
then press [Enter].  
Ambient noise is too high.  
Save: Save the calculated settings  
and exit the automatic  
This message appears if there’s too much background  
noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-  
erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or  
cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
speaker setup.  
Review SP Config: Review the  
speakerconfigurationsettings  
(see “Reviewing the Results”  
on page 59).  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Speaker Detect Error  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
:No  
:Yes  
:---  
:No  
:Yes  
:---  
:Error  
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
There is a problem with the front left speaker. If the  
warning triangle ( ) appears for the subwoofer, it may  
be that the output from the subwoofer is too loud.  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”  
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no  
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections  
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
:No  
:Yes  
:---  
Speaker Detect Error  
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
A different number of speakers has been detected.  
The front right speaker has not been detected.  
Writing Error  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
:No  
:Yes  
:---  
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
Writing Error!  
The surround right speaker has not been detected.  
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or  
cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
Auto Speaker Setup  
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may  
be malfunctioning and you should contact the dealer  
from whom you purchased this unit.  
Retry  
Cancel  
:No  
:Yes  
:---  
:Error  
Speaker Detect Error  
The surround back left speaker has not been detected.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually  
Reviewing the Results  
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic  
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running  
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have  
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 101–106).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select the settings that  
you want to review, and then  
press [Enter].  
Enter  
Notes:  
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-  
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-  
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select  
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see  
page 101).  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Save  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
Enter  
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds  
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-  
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-  
ally.  
The options are:  
Review SP Config  
Review the speaker configuration  
settings.  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very  
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low  
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker  
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,  
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-  
ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the  
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not  
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the  
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or  
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for  
details.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Config  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
Surr Back  
Surr Back Ch  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes  
Full Band  
80Hz  
100Hz  
150Hz  
2ch  
Review SP Distance  
Review the speaker distance set-  
tings.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Distance  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft  
15ft  
15ft  
7ft  
7ft  
7ft  
7ft  
15ft  
Review SP Level  
Review the speaker level settings.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Level  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB  
0dB  
–12dB  
+3dB  
+4dB  
-6dB  
-3dB  
0dB  
Press [Return] to return to the previous  
screen.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
TV Format Setup  
(not North American models)  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”  
and then press [Enter].  
]
3
4
Enter  
The OSD Setup menu appears.  
6-2.OSD Setup  
On  
Standby  
Immediate Display  
Monitor Type  
Display Position  
TV Format  
On  
4:3  
Bottom  
Auto  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
Enter  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Language  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “TV Format,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Enter  
1
Dimmer  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Auto: Select this to have the AV  
receiver automatically detect  
the TV system from the video  
input signals.  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
NTSC: Select if the TV system in  
your area is NTSC.  
Display  
Muting  
Enter  
PAL: Select if the TV system in  
your area is PAL.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
stening Mode  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you  
must specify the TV system used in your area.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Note:  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “6. Miscella-  
]
2
neous,and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The Miscellaneous menu appears.  
Enter  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
AM Frequency Step Setup  
(on some models)  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and  
then press [Enter].  
]
3
4
Enter  
The Tuner menu appears.  
7-3.Tuner  
On  
Standby  
AM Freq Step  
9kHz  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
Enter  
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “AM Freq.  
]
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Step,and then use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are  
used in your area.  
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used  
in your area.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Enter  
1
Dimmer  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Enter  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
stening Mode  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the  
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when  
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [Setup] button.  
1
Note:  
Receiver  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PlayingYour AV Components  
Basic AV Receiver Operation  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
1
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
1
3
Dimmer  
1
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Pre
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.  
1
AV receiver  
Remote  
controller  
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its [Receiver]  
Remote Mode button, and then use its Input Selector buttons.  
Receiver  
Press the [Net/USB] button repeatedly to select Server, USB, or Internet radio.  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
0
Start playback on the source component.  
2
3
4
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-  
nected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI OUT MAIN, HDMI OUT  
SUB, or MONITOR OUT.  
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output  
settings.  
To adjust the volume, use the Master Volume control or the remote con-  
troller’s [VOL] button.  
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for  
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through  
Remote  
controller  
AV receiver  
VOL  
Select a listening mode and enjoy!  
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 88.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Listening to the Radio  
Manual Tuning Mode  
Listening to AM/FM Stations  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
so that the AUTO indicator disap-  
pears from the display.  
1
Tuning Mode  
Tuning  
Press and hold the Tuning Up or  
Down [ ]/[ ] button.  
2
The frequency stops changing when  
you release the button.  
Press the button repeatedly to change  
the frequency one step at a time.  
Tuner  
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for  
easy selection.  
The North American model changes FM frequency in  
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models  
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.  
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select AM or FM.  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be  
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to  
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.  
Band  
Frequency  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations  
Auto Tuning Mode  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
so that the AUTO indicator  
appears on the display.  
1
Press the Tuning Up or Down  
2
[
]/[ ] button.  
Searching stops when a station is  
found.  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM  
STEREO indicator also appears. (The FM STEREO  
indicator will not appear on models that have HD Radio.)  
TUNED  
AUTO  
FM STEREO  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Tuning into Stations by Frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-  
ing the appropriate frequency.  
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information  
Display  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
D.TUN  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Press the [Display] button to dis-  
play the available information.  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Band  
Frequency  
Preset #  
Press the [Receiver] button, fol-  
lowed by the [D.TUN] button.  
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
1
2
Receiver  
Listening mode  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Note:  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see  
page 109), its name is displayed instead of the band  
and frequency.  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the fre-  
quency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),  
press 8, 7, 5.  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
/
TV  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
0
Note:  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
RDS Program Types (PTY)  
Using RDS (not North American  
model)  
Type  
Display  
None  
NONE  
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-  
cator appears.  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
NEWS  
AFFAIRS  
INFO  
RDS indicator  
SPORT  
Education  
EDUCATE  
DRAMA  
Drama  
Culture  
CULTURE  
SCIENCE  
VARIED  
Science and technology  
Varied  
What is RDS?  
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed  
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-  
able in most European countries. Many FM stations use  
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,  
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,  
news, sport, rock, etc.).  
Pop music  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
POP M  
ROCK M  
EASY M  
LIGHT M  
CLASSICS  
OTHER M  
WEATHER  
FINANCE  
CHILDREN  
SOCIAL  
RELIGION  
PHONE IN  
TRAVEL  
LEISURE  
JAZZ  
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-  
tion:  
Finance  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-  
ing the [Display] button will display the frequency for 3  
seconds.  
Phone in  
Travel  
RT (Radio Text)  
Leisure  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text will be shown on the display (see  
page 66).  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
COUNTRY  
NATION M  
OLDIES  
FOLK M  
DOCUMENT  
TEST  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type  
(see page 66).  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (see page 66).  
Alarm  
ALARM  
Notes:  
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV  
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the  
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-  
played when unsupported characters are received.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data  
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
To start the search, press [Enter].  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a  
station of the type you specified, at  
which point it stops briefly before con-  
tinuing with the search.  
4
5
RT/PTY/TP  
When a station you want to listen  
to is found, press [Enter].  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text can be displayed.  
Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
once.  
2
3
The RT information scrolls across the  
display.  
Notes:  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV  
receiver waits for the RT information.  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,  
no RT information is available.  
1
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.  
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select FM.  
2
3
1
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
three times.  
2
If the current radio station is broadcast-  
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will  
appear on the display and traffic news  
will be heard as and when it’s broad-  
cast. If “TP” without square brackets  
appears, this means that the station is  
not broadcasting TP.  
4, 5  
1
You can search for radio stations by type.  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select FM.  
1
To locate a station that is broad-  
3
casting TP, press [Enter].  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a  
station that’s broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
twice.  
The current program type appears on  
the display.  
2
Use the Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select the type of program you  
want.  
3
See the table on page 65.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Listening to HD Radio™ Stations  
(North American model only)  
-
Tape  
7
Tu
8
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conven-  
tional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved  
sound quality, better reception, and new data services.  
HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for  
FM stations and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In  
addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple  
programs on the same frequency by using multicast  
channels. Text data display incudes station name, song  
title, artist name, and so on.  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
,
Enter  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
For more information about HD Radio technology, visit:  
www.ibiquity.com  
Display  
Display  
Muting  
www.hdradio.com  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
HD Radio stations broadcast on the same AM and FM  
frequencies they’ve always used, and you can receive  
them by tuning into your favorite station as normal (see  
page 63).You can store them as presets just like AM and  
FM stations (see page 82).  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
Audio Sel  
RC-688M  
If the currentAM or FM station supports HD Radio tech-  
nology, the HD indicator lights up.  
Audio Selector  
While a digital HD Radio transmission is being received,  
the DIGITAL indicator lights up. While an analog HD  
Radio transmission is being received, the ANALOG  
indicator lights up.  
Station name  
HD indicator  
Display Enter  
Song title  
Artist name  
HD Radio channel number  
• If the current AM or FM station supports HD Radio  
technology, the station’s name will be displayed  
instead of the band and frequency.  
• When music data is received, song title and artist name  
information is displayed.  
• If the current HD Radio station supports multicast  
channels, the name of the currently selected multicast  
channel will be displayed.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting Multicast Channels  
Displaying HD Radio Information  
FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs  
on the same frequency by using what are calledmulticast  
channels. If the current HD Radio station is broadcasting  
multicast channels, the SPS (secondary program ser-  
vices) indicator lights up.  
Press the [Display] button repeatedly to cycle through  
the available information.  
Frequency  
Press [Enter].  
The SPS indicator flashes.  
1
Station information  
Artist information  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down Arrow  
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a multi-  
cast channel, and then press  
[Enter] within 5 seconds.  
Enter  
If you select a multicast channel that is  
not currently broadcasting, a plus [+]  
symbol will appear, indicating that the  
channel has been reserved. When  
broadcasting commences, that channel  
will be selected automatically.  
Song title information  
Enter  
Reserved channel indication  
HD Radio channel number  
Note:  
• Multicast channels are not available  
on AM.  
Selecting the Audio Format (Blend Mode)  
HD Radio stations transmit both analog and digital ver-  
sions of their programs and you can choose which one  
you want to listen to.  
Remote  
controller  
Use the [Audio Sel] button to  
select Auto or Analog.  
Audio Sel  
AV receiver  
Auto: Select to use the digital sig-  
nal.  
Analog: Select to use the analog sig-  
nal.  
Note:  
• Multicast channels 2 through 8 only carry a digital sig-  
nal, so to select an audio format, you must select mul-  
ticast channel #1 first.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Connecting the XM Mini-Tuner and Home  
Dock  
®
Listening to XM Satellite Radio  
(North American Model Only)  
To receive XM Satellite Radio, you need an XM Mini-  
Tuner and Home Dock, which includes a home antenna.  
These are sold separately. For connection information,  
refer to the instruction manual supplied with the XM  
Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.  
Important XM Radio Information  
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of  
commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news,  
talk and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior  
digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reg-  
gae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for  
every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the rich-  
est selection of music is matched by its passion for  
live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute  
news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and  
much more. For U.S. customers, information about  
XM Satellite Radio is available online at www.xmra-  
dio.com. For Canadian customers, information about  
XM Canada is online at  
XM Mini-Tuner jack  
XM  
XM  
SIRIUS  
www.xmradio.ca.  
M
2
1
2
Note:  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold sepa-  
rately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activa-  
tion fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.  
All fees and programming subject to change. Channels  
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL.  
Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by  
calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and  
1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents).  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Setup  
Display  
Muting  
For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels  
and advertising-supported channels, visit  
lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or xmradio.ca  
(Canadian residents).  
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode  
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available  
at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Cana-  
dian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous  
United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio  
Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the  
property of their respective owners.  
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must  
set the Satellite Radio mode to XM.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
1
Receiver  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
A warning against reverse engineering:  
It is prohibited to, and you agree that you will not, copy,  
decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manip-  
ulate, or otherwise access and/or make available any  
technology incorporated in receivers compatible with  
the XM Satellite Radio system. Furthermore, the  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
®
2
AMBE voice compression software included in this  
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
product is protected by intellectual property rights  
including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of  
Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The software is licensed  
solely for use within this product. The user of this or any  
other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly  
prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse  
engineer, hack, manipulate or disassemble the object  
code, or in any other way convert the object code into  
human-readable form.  
Enter  
7.Hardware Setup  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
Enter  
6.Network  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and  
then press [Enter].  
]
3
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
Enter  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
The Tuner screen appears.  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
7-3.Tuner  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Satellite Radio  
None  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Tuner  
11  
12  
Enter  
D.TUN  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select “XM.”  
]
Dimmer  
4
+
If there are 2 items on the Tuner  
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Satellite  
Radio.”  
Enter  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
]
-
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons cycles through the following  
]
options: None XM SIRIUS →  
XM/SIRIUS  
Enter  
Selecting XM Satellite Radio  
None: Select if you’re not using  
satellite radio.  
XM: Select to use XM Satellite  
Radio.  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Tuner] Input Selector button  
repeatedly to select XM.  
AV receiver  
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-  
lite Radio.  
XM/SIRIUS: Select to use XM Satel-  
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-  
ellite Radio.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-  
ton, and then press the [Tuner]  
Input Selector button repeatedly  
to select XM.  
Remote  
controller  
Receiver  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If “CHECK XM TUNER” appears on  
the display, make sure the XM Mini-  
Tuner is connected properly.  
Tuner  
Signing Up for XM Satellite Radio  
Tuning  
/
Enter  
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner and Home  
Dock, you are ready to subscribe to XM Satellite Radio.  
You’ll need a major credit card and your XM Radio ID.  
There are three places you can find your 8-character XM  
Radio ID:  
1. On the XM Mini-Tuner  
2. On the XM Mini-Tuner packaging  
3. On XM Channel 0, as explained below  
Tuner  
Setup  
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select RADIO  
ID.  
Your XM Radio ID number is dis-  
played. Write it below for reference.  
ID  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Category Search Mode  
To sign up, go to:  
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
http://activate.xmradio.com  
Or call: 1-800-967-2346  
1
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Category Search mode.  
Receiver  
Enter  
For XM Canada, go to:  
http://xmradio.ca  
Or call: 1-877-438-9677  
Notes:  
• RADIO ID cannot be selected in Category Search  
mode. You must select Channel Search mode (see  
right column).  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select a category, and  
use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
• The following letters are not used in XM Satellite  
Radio IDs: I, O, S, F.  
]
Enter  
• XM Satellite Radio will transmit a special signal to  
your AV receiver to activate the full channel lineup.  
Activation normally takes between 10 and 15 minutes,  
but during busy peak periods, you may need to leave  
the AV receiver turned on for up to an hour.  
buttons to select a channel in  
that category.  
Selecting XM Radio Channels  
Direct Tuning  
You can select an XM radio channel directly by entering  
its number.  
There are three ways to select XM radio channels:  
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.  
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-  
gory.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[D.TUN] button.  
1
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.  
Receiver  
Note:  
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
You can’t select Channel Search mode or Category  
Search mode while the Tuning Arrow  
are flashing, as tuning is in progress.  
indicators  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Channel Search Mode  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the channel  
number.  
For example, to select channel #20,  
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].  
1
2
2
Mode button, and then press the  
[ENTER] button repeatedly to  
select Channel Search mode.  
Receiver  
Enter  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
D.TUN  
Clear  
Net/USB  
Note:  
12  
0
11  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a channel.  
]
Channel number  
Enter  
Channel name  
You can also use the Left and Right  
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.  
[
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Displaying XM Radio Information  
Tuning  
/
AV receiver  
Memory  
Enter  
Return  
Press the [Display] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
Remote  
controller  
Display  
Tuning Mode  
The following information can be displayed:  
Display  
Channel name  
2
Remote
Channel number & preset number  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Category Artist Song title Listening mode  
Dimmer  
Notes:  
+
• If the category, artist, or song title is not available,  
“- - -” will be displayed instead.  
Enter  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
CH +/–  
Display  
-
Prev  
CH  
• The listening mode is not displayed when Zone 2 or  
Zone 3 is selected.  
Return  
Display  
Muting  
Positioning the XM Mini-Tuner System  
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:  
You can check the signal strength of the XM radio signal  
and adjust the position of the XM Mini-Tuner system  
accordingly.  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
repeatedly to select Channel  
Search mode or Category Search  
mode.  
1
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select  
a category.  
2
3
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use theTuning Up and Down [ ]/  
[
] buttons to select a channel.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
]
2
In Channel Search mode, you can  
select any channel.  
In Category Search mode, you can only  
select channels from the currently  
selected category.  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
Enter  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Selecting the Previous Channel:  
Enter  
AV receiver  
To listen to the previously  
selected XM channel, press the  
[Return] button.  
Note:  
• If the Satellite Radio mode is set to  
None (see page 70), the “4. Satellite  
Radio” item is not available.  
Remote  
controller  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
UPDATING  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Satellite  
Radio,and then press [Enter].  
The Satellite Radio screen appears.  
The name of the currently selected  
input selector is displayed in a box.  
]
3
XM is updating your Mini-Tuner with the latest  
encryption code. Wait a few seconds until the update  
is done. Alternatively, you may be attempting to tune  
to a channel that is blocked or that you cannot  
receive with your subscription package. To receive  
that channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.  
Enter  
NO SIGNAL  
Enter  
The XM Mini-Tuner cannot receive the satellite sig-  
nal. Check the XM antenna for obstructions to the  
southern sky. Check the antenna positioning with the  
Antenna Aiming function (see left column).  
Position the XM Mini-Tuner  
Antenna so that as many bars as  
possible (up to 3) appear on the  
XM Satellite signal strength  
meter.  
The best signal is achieved when the  
antenna is pointing to the southern sky  
through an unobstructed window.  
4
LOADING  
The AV receiver is tuning or decoding audio or text  
data. Please wait. If this occurs often, check the XM  
antenna position with the Antenna Aiming function  
(see left column).  
OFF AIR  
The XM channel you selected is not currently broad-  
casting. Select another channel.  
4-4.SAT Radio  
XM Antenna Aiming  
UPGRADE XM TUNER  
The connected XM CNP-1000 is incompatible. The  
AV receiver features advanced technology that is  
designed for use with the XM Mini-Tuner. Contact  
XM Listener Care and ask about upgrading your XM  
CNP-1000 to an XM Mini-Tuner. Have the AV  
receiver’s model name and CNP-1000 XM ID num-  
ber ready beforehand, and explain that your AV  
receiver is displaying the message “Upgrade XM  
Tuner.” If you already have an XM Mini-Tuner con-  
nected and you see this message, turn off the AV  
receiver, make sure the XM Mini-Tuner is properly  
seated in the Mini-Tuner Dock, and then turn the AV  
receiver back on again. If the message reappears,  
contact XM Listener Care and explain the issue that  
you’re experiencing and the corrective actions  
you’ve tried.  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,  
position the XM Mini-Tuner System so  
that as many bars as possible (up to 3)  
appear on the XM Terrestrial signal  
strength meter.  
Notes:  
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy  
tion.  
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.  
ellite Radio mode is set to XM or XM/SIRIUS (see  
page 70).  
CHECK XM TUNER  
The AV receiver is having difficulty communicating  
with the XM Mini-Tuner module. Make sure the XM  
Mini-Tuner is properly seated in the Mini-Tuner  
Dock. And make sure the Mini-Tuner Dock cable is  
properly connected to the AV receiver and is not  
damaged. If the issue persists, contact XM Listener  
Care. Have the AV receiver’s model name ready  
beforehand, and explain the issue that you’re experi-  
encing and the corrective actions you’ve tried.  
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to  
XM/SIRIUS (see page 70), signal strength meters for  
both systems appear on the same screen.  
XM Radio Messages  
The following messages may appear while using XM  
Satellite radio.  
Unavailable Channel  
You may be attempting to select a channel that is  
unavailable or has changed to a different channel  
number. Check xmradio.com for the latest channel  
listing.  
CHECK ANTENNA  
The XM antenna is not properly connected to the  
Mini-Tuner Dock. Check the connection. Check the  
antenna cable for damage.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
®
Listening to SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Indoor/outdoor antenna  
with 21-foot cable  
(North American Models Only)  
SiriusConnect  
Important SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information  
SIRIUS is available in the US for subscribers with  
addresses in the continental US and is available in  
Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. To  
Get SIRIUS Satellite Radio a subscription and  
compatible tuner and antenna are required and sold  
separately. Visit sirius.com for the most complete  
and up-to-date channel lineup and information.  
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related  
marks are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
AC power  
receiver  
8-pin mini DIN  
connector cable  
SIRIUS  
SIRIUS  
XM  
SIRIUS  
jack  
Note:  
Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold  
separately. Installation costs and other fees and taxes,  
including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscrip-  
tion fee is consumer only. All fees and programming  
subject to change.  
AV receiver  
To use the included antenna indoors, you must place it at  
a north-, west-, or east-facing window, depending on  
where you live. If this isn’t possible, you’ll need to  
install it outside, away from any overhead obstructions.  
What is SIRIUS Satellite Radio?  
TM  
Simply The Best Radio on Radio with all your favor-  
ite entertainment including 100% commercial-free  
music, plus superior sports coverage, uncensored talk  
and comedy, world-class entertainment, news, weather  
and more for your car, home or office. For more informa-  
tion visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca  
Positioning the Antenna  
For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be  
positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine  
which area you are in and position the antenna accord-  
ingly.  
A warning against reverse engineering:  
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse  
engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in  
receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
system.  
SKY  
NORTH  
“SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog  
logo are registered trademarks of  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.  
1
4
5
WEST  
EAST  
3
2
HORIZON  
SOUTH  
Setting Up the SiriusConnect™ Home  
Tuner  
Area 1: Point the antenna toward the sky in the east,  
northeast, or southeast, either through a window or out-  
side.  
The optional SiriusConnect Home tuner kit includes  
everything for easy home installation, including the Sir-  
iusConnect receiver, indoor/outdoor antenna with 21-  
foot cable, 8-pin mini DIN connector cable, and an AC  
power adapter. See the SiriusConnect Home tuner’s  
instructions for more information.  
Use the 8-pin mini DIN connector cable to connect the  
SiriusConnect receiver to the SIRIUS jack on the rear of  
the AV receiver.  
Area 2: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or  
northeast, either through a window or outside.  
Area 3: Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or  
northwest, either through a window or outside.  
Area 4: Point the antenna toward the sky in the west,  
northwest, or southwest, either through a window or  
outside.  
Area 5: Put the antenna outside and point it straight up.  
The antenna cannot be used indoors.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Tuning  
/
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and  
then press [Enter].  
]
Enter  
3
4
Enter  
The Tuner screen appears.  
7-3.Tuner  
Satellite Radio  
None  
Enter  
Tuner  
Setup  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select “SIRIUS.”  
]
On  
Standby  
TV  
If there are 2 items on the Tuner  
screen,use Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Satellite  
Radio.”  
Input  
Enter  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
]
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Pressing the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons cycles through the following  
options: None XM SIRIUS →  
XM/SIRIUS  
]
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Tuner  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Enter  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
None: Select if you’re not using  
satellite radio.  
XM: Select to use XM Satellite  
Radio.  
SIRIUS: Select to use SIRIUS Satel-  
lite Radio.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Setup  
XM/SIRIUS: Select to use XM Satel-  
lite Radio and SIRIUS Sat-  
ellite Radio.  
Display  
Muting  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Setting the Satellite Radio Mode  
Setup closes.  
Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you  
must set the Satellite Radio mode to SIRIUS.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
On the AV receiver, press the  
AV receiver  
[Tuner] Input Selector button  
repeatedly to select SIRIUS.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Receiver] Remote Mode but-  
ton, and then press the [Tuner]  
Input Selector button repeatedly  
to select SIRIUS.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
Remote  
controller  
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
Receiver  
7.Hardware Setup  
If “CHECK SR TUNER” appears on  
the display, make sure the SiriusCon-  
nect receiver is connected properly. If  
“ANTENNA ERROR” appears, make  
sure the antenna is connected properly.  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
Tuner  
Enter  
6.Network  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Channel Search Mode  
Signing Up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Before you can use SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must  
first sign up for an account. You’ll need a major credit  
card and your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID, which you can  
get from the AV receiver, as explained below, or from the  
SiriusConnect Home tuner package.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
1
Receiver  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Channel Search mode.  
Enter  
Use the TUNING Up and Down  
1
[
]/[ ] buttons to select  
channel 0.  
Your SIRIUS Satellite Radio ID num-  
ber is displayed. Write it below.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a channel.  
Channel number  
]
2
Enter  
ID  
To sign up, go to:  
http://activate.siriusradio.com  
2
Channel name  
Or call: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (7474)  
You can also use the Left and Right  
]/[ ] buttons to select a category.  
[
Note:  
Your ID is also displayed on the Satellite Radio  
screen. See “Positioning the SiriusConnect Home  
Antenna” on page 80.  
Category Search Mode  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
1
Receiver  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Enter] button repeatedly to  
select Category Search mode.  
Selecting SIRIUS Satellite Radio Channels  
There are three ways to select SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
channels:  
1. Channel Search mode: select any channel.  
2. Category Search mode: select channels by cate-  
gory.  
Enter  
3. Direct tuning: enter channel number.  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select a category, and  
use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a channel in  
that category.  
]
2
]
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
D.TUN  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Direct Tuning  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
You can select a SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel directly  
by entering its number.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[D.TUN] button.  
1
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Receiver  
-
The [Receiver] button flashes.  
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
D.TUN  
Clear  
Listening Mode  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Parental Lock  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the channel  
number.  
For example, to select channel #20,  
press 0, 2, 0, or 2, 0, [Enter].  
2
With SIRIUS Parental Lock, you can lock out channels  
that you do not want to receive and use a 4-digit PIN  
number to prevent others from unlocking them.  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
D.TUN  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Clear  
Note:  
0
11  
12  
While the [Receiver] button is flashing,  
you cannot select another input source  
with the remote controller.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Notes:  
• If you select an unavailable channel, “INVALID  
CHANNEL” appears on the display.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
2
• If you select a channel that you are not subscribed to,  
“CALL SIRIUS” appears on the display.  
Enter  
• Channels that are locked must be unlocked before you  
can listen to them. See “Parental Lock” on right col-  
umn for more information.  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
Selecting Channels on the AV receiver:  
Enter  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Press the [Tuning Mode] button  
1
repeatedly to select Channel  
Search mode or Category Search  
mode.  
Note:  
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to  
None or XM (see page 75), the “5. SIR-  
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-  
able.  
Press [Enter] repeatedly to select  
a category.  
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS  
Parental Lock,and then press  
[Enter].  
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen  
appears.  
]
3
Use the Tuning Up and Down  
3
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a chan-  
Enter  
nel.  
In Channel Search mode, you can  
select any channel.  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
In Category Search mode, you can only  
select channels from the currently  
selected category.  
Enter  
Enter Code  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Selecting the Previous Channel:  
AV receiver  
To listen to the previously  
selected SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
channel, press the [Return] but-  
ton.  
Remote  
controller  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
8
4
D.TUN  
Clear  
enter the 4-digit PIN number.  
Or  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
]
Notes:  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the PIN number.  
• While a channel is locked, it cannot be selected for  
listening.  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
• To unlock a channel, you must enter the correct PIN  
number and change it to Unlocked in step 6.  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
D.TUN  
Net/USB  
If you’re entering the PIN number for  
the very first time, the PIN is stored,  
and the following screen appears.  
Clear  
0
11  
12  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
or  
Edit Code  
Parental Lock  
Enter  
If you’ve already set a PIN number, you  
must enter the correct PIN to get to this  
screen. If you enter the wrong PIN, the  
message “Wrong Code!” appears and  
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.  
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
Number  
buttons  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
5
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
buttons to selectParental Lock,”  
and then press [Enter].  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
D.TUN  
Enter  
Input Selector  
The Parental Lock screen appears.  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Parental Lock  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
Channel  
0ch  
Status  
Locked  
Enter  
wwwwwwwww  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
:CHANNEL  
:STATUS  
:SAVE  
:RETURN  
ENT  
RET  
-
Prev  
CH  
y  
Muting  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a channel, and  
]
6
7
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select Locked or  
Unlocked.  
The number, name, and status of the  
currently selected channel is displayed.  
]
Enter  
Changing the PIN Number  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
When you’ve finished, press  
[Enter] to save your changes, or  
press [Return] to return to the  
previous screen without saving.  
When [Enter] is pressed, the confirma-  
tion message “Locked” or “Unlocked”  
appears.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Enter  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Edit Code,”  
and then press [Enter].  
]
2
5
6
Enter  
Enter  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
The New Code screen appears.  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
New Code  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Enter  
Enter  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Note:  
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
enter the new 4-digit PIN number.  
D.TUN  
Clear  
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to  
None or XM (see page 75), the “5. SIR-  
IUS Parental Lock” item is not avail-  
able.  
Or  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
/TV  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “5. SIRIUS  
Parental Lock,and then press  
[Enter].  
The SIRIUS Parental Lock screen  
appears.  
]
3
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
]
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the new PIN number.  
The Confirm screen appears.  
Enter  
D.TUN  
Net/USB  
Clear  
0
11  
12  
or  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Enter  
Enter Code  
Comfirm  
Enter  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D.TUN  
Clear  
Press the [D.TUN] button, and  
then use the number buttons to  
enter the old 4-digit PIN number.  
4
Confirm the new PIN number by  
entering it again.  
If you confirm the PIN number cor-  
rectly, the new PIN is saved and the  
message “Complete” appears.  
If you confirm the PIN number incor-  
rectly, “Wrong Code!” appears, and  
you’ll be returned to step 5 to try again.  
7
8
Or  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game  
4
/TV  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select a number on the  
screen, and then press [Enter].  
Repeat this for each of the four  
digits in the old PIN number.  
If you enter the correct PIN number, the  
following screen appears.  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
D.TUN  
Net/USB  
Clear  
0
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
11  
12  
or  
4-5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Edit Code  
Parental Lock  
Enter  
If you enter the wrong PIN number, the  
message “Wrong Code!” appears and  
you’ll have to enter the PIN again.  
Enter  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Tuning  
/
Enter  
Positioning the SiriusConnect Home  
Antenna  
You can check the strength of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
signal and adjust the position of the SiriusConnect Home  
antenna accordingly.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Tuner] button, and [Setup] but-  
ton.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
Tuner  
Setup  
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Enter  
Dimmer  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
]
2
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
-
Enter  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Display  
Muting  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Enter  
Displaying SIRIUS Satellite Radio  
Information  
Note:  
If the Satellite Radio mode is set to  
None (see page 75), the “4. Satellite  
Radio” item is not available.  
Press the [Display] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
AV receiver  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Satellite  
]
3
Remote  
controller  
Radio,and then press [Enter].  
The Satellite Radio screen appears.  
The name of the currently selected  
input selector is displayed in a box.  
Enter  
Display  
The following information can be displayed:  
Enter  
Channel name  
Channel number & preset number  
Category  
Artist/composer  
Song title  
Listening mode  
Note:  
• If the category, artist/composer, or song title is not  
available, “- - -” will be displayed instead.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Messages  
Position the SiriusConnect Home  
4
antenna so that as many bars as  
possible (up to 3) appear on the  
SIRIUS Satellite signal strength  
meter.  
The following messages may appear while using  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio.  
ACQUIRING  
The SiriusConnect receiver is acquiring the signal or  
no signal is present. Make sure the SiriusConnect  
Home tuner is connected properly and that there are  
no obstacles close by.  
4-4.SAT Radio  
SIRIUS Antenna Aiming  
ANTENNA ERROR  
Satellite  
Terrestrial  
Make sure the SiriusConnect Home tuner is con-  
nected properly.  
SIRIUS ID 000000000000  
SUB UPDATED  
If you cannot receive a satellite signal,  
position the SiriusConnect Home  
antenna so that as many bars as possible  
(up to 3) appear on the SIRIUS Terres-  
trial signal strength meter.  
Displayed while your subscription is being updated.  
No operations can be performed until this message  
has cleared.  
UPDATING XXX%  
Displayed while the channel map is being updated.  
Wait until the updating is complete.  
Notes:  
• So long as the signal strength is good, you can enjoy  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio by using either satellite or ter-  
restrial reception.  
UPDATING  
Displayed while the SiriusConnect receiver’s firm-  
ware is being updated.  
• Terrestrial signals are only available in certain areas.  
INVALID CHANNEL  
• The SIRIUS information on the Satellite Radio screen  
is only displayed when the Satellite Radio mode is set  
to SIRIUS or XM/SIRIUS (see page 75).  
Displayed if you select an unavailable channel.  
CALL SIRIUS  
• If you’re using both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio and the Satellite mode is set to  
XM/SIRIUS (see page 75), signal strength meters for  
both systems appear on the same screen.  
Displayed when you select a channel to which you  
are not subscribed. Call SIRIUS if you want to sub-  
scribe.  
CHECK SR TUNER  
Displayed if the SiriusConnect receiver is not con-  
nected. Make sure the SiriusConnect receiver is con-  
nected properly, and make sure its AC adapter is  
plugged in.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting Presets  
Presetting AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS  
Stations  
Preset  
2, 4  
3
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite  
AM, FM, XM, and SIRIUS radio stations.  
+
CH  
CH +/–  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Tune into the AM, FM, XM, or SIR-  
Prev  
CH  
1
IUS station you want to store as a  
preset.  
Muting  
Press the [Memory] button.  
The preset number flashes.  
2
To select a preset, use the Preset  
]/[ ] buttons or the remote  
controller’s CH [+/–] button.  
[
+
While the preset number is flash-  
CH  
3
Disc  
Album  
ing (about 8 seconds), use the  
Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons to select  
a preset from 1 through 40.  
-
Press the [Memory] button again  
to store the station.  
4
Deleting Presets  
The station is stored and the preset  
number stops flashing.  
2
favorite stations.  
Note:  
You can name your radio presets for easy identifica-  
tion (see page 109).  
Select the preset that you want to  
delete.  
See the previous section.  
1
2
While holding down the [Mem-  
ory] button, press the  
[Tuning Mode] button.  
The preset is deleted and its number  
disappears from the display.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Common Functions  
This section explains functions that can be used with any  
input source.  
Adjusting Speaker Levels  
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-  
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are  
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.  
Tun
8
Tape  
7
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Use the remote controller’s  
Press  
[Receiver]  
first  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
[CH Sel] button to select each  
speaker,and use the [Level–] and  
[Level+] buttons to adjust the vol-  
ume.  
CH Sel  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
Display  
Sleep  
You can adjust the volume of each  
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB  
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).  
+
Level  
-
Level+  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Notes:  
Stereo  
You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is  
muted.  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
CH Sel  
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker  
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 101).  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Level – +  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
Headphones  
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the  
[CH Sel], [Level–], and [Level+] buttons to adjust the  
volume of each headphone speaker (left and right), from  
–12 dB to +12 dB each.  
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to  
Standby.  
Phones  
Dimmer  
Display  
Muting the AV Receiver  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.  
Setting the Display Brightness  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Muting] button.  
You can adjust the brightness of the display.  
The output is muted and the MUTING  
indicator flashes on the display.  
Muting  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Dimmer] button repeatedly to  
select: Normal, Dim, or Dimmer.  
Remote  
controller  
Dimmer  
You can also use the AV receiver’s  
[Dimmer] button (not Australian mod-  
els).  
AV receiver  
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote control-  
ler’s [Muting] button again, or adjust the volume. The  
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to  
Standby.  
Tip:  
You can specify how much the output is muted with the  
Muting Level setting (see page 111).  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Common Functions—Continued  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Displaying Source Information  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that  
it turns off automatically after a specified period.  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
Remote  
controller  
Press the remote controller’s  
Press the [Display] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
Sleep  
[Sleep] button repeatedly to  
select the required sleep time.  
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10  
minutes in 10 minute steps.  
Display  
AV receiver  
The SLEEP indicator appears on the  
display when the sleep timer has been  
set, as shown. The specified sleep time  
appears on the display for about 5 sec-  
onds, then the previous display reap-  
pears.  
The following information can typically be displayed:  
SLEEP indicator  
Input source  
Listening  
mode  
Signal format*  
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [Sleep] button  
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.  
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [Sleep]  
button. Note that if you press the [Sleep] button while the  
sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep  
time by 10 minutes.  
Sampling  
frequency  
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is  
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling fre-  
quency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not  
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is  
displayed. For some digital input signals, including mul-  
tichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,  
and sampling frequency is displayed.  
Using Headphones  
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo  
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s  
Phones jack.  
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the  
previous display reappears.  
Notes:  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the Phones  
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone  
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are  
not turned off.)  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to  
Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays the  
same.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Common Functions—Continued  
Selecting Audio Inputs  
Specifying the Digital Signal Format  
1 2  
Playlist  
Rec  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Audio Sel  
VCR  
RC-688M  
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital  
input signals automatically. However, if you experience  
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS  
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut  
off, try the PCM setting.  
If you connect a component to more than one audio  
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,  
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the [Audio  
Sel] button to select which audio input you want to use  
to listen to that component.  
Press the [Audio Sel] button  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-  
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.  
repeatedly to select an audio  
Audio Sel  
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >  
Analog.  
Press the [Audio Selector] button  
repeatedly to select Auto.  
1
IN, and the HDMI indicator  
appears on the display. (The  
HDMI IN must already be  
assigned to the current input  
selector. See page 50.)  
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-  
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL  
IN, and the DIGITAL indica-  
tor appears on the display.  
(The DIGITAL IN must  
WhileAutois shown on the dis-  
2
play, use the Tone Plus [+] and  
Minus [–] buttons to select:  
PCM: Only input signals in PCM  
format are output, and the  
PCM indicator lights up. The  
indicator flashes if the input  
signal is not PCM.  
already be assigned to the  
current input selector. See  
page 52.) If there is no digital  
signal, the analog input is  
used instead.  
DTS: Only input signals in DTS  
format are output, and the  
DTS indicator lights up. The  
indicator flashes if the input  
signal is not DTS.  
Multich:Selects the multichannel  
cator appears on the display.  
(The multichannel input must  
already be assigned to the  
current input selector. See  
page 53.)  
Auto(default):The format is detected  
automatically. If no digital  
input signal is present, the  
analog input is used instead.  
Analog: Selects the analog input, and  
the ANALOG indicator  
appears on the display.  
You can also use the [Audio Selector]  
button on the AV receiver.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Common Functions—Continued  
Using the Late Night Function  
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the  
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can  
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume  
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you  
don’t want to disturb anyone.  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[L Night] button repeatedly.  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital  
Plus sources, the options are:  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Receiver  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
L Night  
Off: Late Night function off  
(default).  
Low: Small reduction in dynamic  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
range.  
Prev  
CH  
High: Large reduction in dynamic  
Display  
Muting  
range.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options  
are:  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Auto: The dynamic range is con-  
trolled automatically based  
on the source material and the  
current volume setting  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Re-EQ  
VCR  
(default).  
L Night  
RC-688M  
Off: Late Night function off.  
On: Late Night function on.  
Notes:  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the  
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or  
Dolby TrueHD.  
Using the Re-EQ Function  
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a  
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,  
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
material that you are playing and the intention of the  
original sound designer, and with some material there  
will be little or no effect when you select the different  
options.  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-  
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,  
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-  
channel.  
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV  
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,  
it will be set to Auto.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the [Re-  
Receiver  
EQ] button.  
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn  
off the Re-EQ function.  
Re-EQ  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Common Functions—Continued  
Tone Control Settings  
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,  
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-  
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.  
Bass  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB  
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Treble  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from  
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Note:  
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct  
listening mode is selected.  
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver  
1
2
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]  
button repeatedly to select Bass  
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-  
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.  
1
2
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus  
[–] buttons to adjust.  
Notes:  
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when  
the Direct listening mode is selected.  
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-  
tening modes.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting with the Remote Controller  
Selecting the Listening Modes  
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the  
Listening Modes” on page 93.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes  
can only be selected if your DVD player is  
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
• The listening modes you can select depends  
on the format of the input signal. To check  
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-  
tion” on page 84.  
Surround  
Stereo  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
,
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
All ST  
THX  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Direct  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
• While a pair of headphones is connected,  
you can only select the Mono, Direct, or Ste-  
reo listening mode.  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
Selecting on the AV Receiver  
[Stereo] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
Stereo  
[Surround] button  
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-  
ing modes.  
Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
[Direct] button  
Listening Mode  
This button selects the Direct listening mode.  
[Stereo] button  
[THX] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
Listening Mode [ ]/[ ] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
[All ST] button  
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening  
mode.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format  
Analog and PCM Sources  
PCM  
Multi  
Multichannel PCM  
32–96 kHz  
*/2  
176.4/192 kHz*1  
Source format  
channel  
analog  
176.4/  
192kHz*1  
32–96  
kHz  
except */2  
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel  
2ch  
Media  
CD, TV, radio  
DVD  
DVD DVD  
Button  
Listening Mode  
[Direct] Direct  
[Stereo] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Dolby TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*2  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*2  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*3  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX*3  
*2  
*3  
Neo:6 THX*3  
Dolby PLII THX Games  
Mode  
[THX]  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
3
*
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
and 88.2 kHz respectively.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources  
DSD*1  
Dolby D  
Multichannel  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Multichannel  
Multichannel  
Source format  
2ch 1/0, 1+1  
2ch 1/0, 1+1  
except  
*/2  
except  
*/2  
3/2  
2ch  
*/2  
*/2  
Media  
SACD  
DVD, DTV, etc.  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Button  
[Direct]  
[Stereo]  
Listening Mode  
*2  
Direct  
*2  
Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
*3  
*3  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Dolby TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*4  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*4  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*4  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*5  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLIITHX Games Mode  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
[THX]  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
5
*
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.  
*2. With the Delay Enable DSD setting on the Direct screen set to No (see page 98), if the source is DSD, the Direct listening mode becomes DSD Direct,  
“DSD Direct” appears on the display, and the Speaker Configuration settings are ignored.  
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.  
*4. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*5. Available only when using surround speakers.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
TrueHD and DTS Sources  
TrueHD*1  
DTS, DTS96/24  
Multichannel  
DTS-ES  
Discrete/  
Matrix  
Multichannel  
Source format  
2ch  
1/0, 1+1  
2ch  
1/0  
except  
*/2  
except  
*/2  
*/2  
*/2  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
DVD, CD, etc.  
Button  
[Direct]  
[Stereo]  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
*2  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*3  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*3  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*4  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
[THX]  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
4
*
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are processed as 192 kHz 2-channel audio, regardless of the number of channels.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.  
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-HD Sources  
DTS-HD Master Audio*1  
Multichannel  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
Multichannel  
except */2 */2  
Source format  
2ch  
1/0  
2ch  
1/0  
except */2  
*/2  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Button  
[Direct]  
Listening Mode  
Direct  
[Stereo] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*2  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*2  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
*3  
*3  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*2  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLII THX Games  
Mode  
[THX]  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*4  
*1. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed at 96 kHz.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby Digital Plus  
About the Listening Modes  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal  
resolution.  
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with  
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Direct  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete  
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-  
bit sampling rate and signal resolution.  
In this mode, audio from the input source is output  
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-  
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are  
output as they are.  
Stereo  
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to  
96 kHz and 2-channel sources up to 192 kHz.  
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.  
Mono  
DTS NEO:6  
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono  
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language  
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of  
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other  
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke  
DVDs.  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-  
nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of  
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing  
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener.  
• NEO:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,  
DVD, VHS).  
Multichannel  
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel  
sources.  
• NEO:6 Music  
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,  
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-  
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-  
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.  
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-  
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby  
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.  
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,  
TV, VHS, DVD).  
DTS  
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to  
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-  
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that  
bear the DTS logo.  
DTS 96/24  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is  
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and  
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with  
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.  
DTS-ES Discrete  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks  
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true  
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate  
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-  
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan  
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear  
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-  
crete soundtrack.  
• Dolby PLIIx Game  
Use this mode with video games, especially those  
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.  
Dolby Digital  
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital  
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most  
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you  
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a  
movie theater or concert hall.  
DTS-ES Matrix  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks  
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-  
ES logo.  
Dolby EX  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital  
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround  
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra  
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound  
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal  
resolution.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
• THX Surround EX  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-  
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit  
sampling rate and signal resolution.  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby  
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known  
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-  
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.  
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to  
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.  
Onkyo Original DSP Modes  
Neural THX 5.1/7.1  
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-  
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a  
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-  
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX  
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-  
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,  
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,  
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-  
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be  
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-  
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can  
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM  
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-  
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can  
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.  
Mono Movie  
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono  
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,  
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other  
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.  
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode  
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the  
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a  
large hall.  
Unplugged  
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this  
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the  
impression of being right in front of the stage.  
Studio-Mix  
DSD  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this  
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-  
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.  
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format  
used to store digital audio on SuperAudio CDs (SACD).  
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-  
channel audio.  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-  
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire  
sound, and clarity to voices.  
THX  
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-  
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-  
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.  
• THX Cinema  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-  
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,  
and surround back speakers.  
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-  
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they  
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.  
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-  
istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the  
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used  
with 2-channel sources processed with other for-  
mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back  
speaker output depends on the source material and  
the selected listening mode.  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in  
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of  
where you are within the listening room.  
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)  
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround  
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by  
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right  
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode  
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.  
• THX Ultra2 Cinema  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-  
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-  
position of the surround source, optimizing the  
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-  
round back channel output.  
Note:  
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby  
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of  
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6  
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.  
• THX Music Mode  
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands  
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.  
• THX Games Mode  
This mode is designed for use with video games. It  
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for  
6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording  
This section explains how to record the input source and  
how to record audio and video from separate sources.  
Recording from Different AV Sources  
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by  
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-  
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio  
source is switched when an audio-only input source,  
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video  
source remains the same.  
Notes:  
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot  
be recorded.  
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.  
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input  
cannot be recorded.  
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-  
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-  
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded  
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.  
Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to  
the manuals supplied with your digital recording  
equipment for more details.  
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-  
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the  
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from  
digital to analog or vice versa.  
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t  
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.  
Camcorder  
Recording the Input Source  
video signal  
audio signal  
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-  
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be  
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-  
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 29 to 45  
for hookup information.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
A
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
MONITOR  
3
2
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
V
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
Use the input selector buttons to  
select the source that you want  
to record.  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
1
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
M
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
OUT  
See “Which Connections Should I  
Use?” on page 30 to see which signals  
can be output and recorded.  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
CD player  
VCR  
You can watch the source while record-  
ing it. The AV receiver’s Master Vol-  
ume control has no effect on recording.  
Remote  
controller  
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for  
playback.  
1
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Prepare the VCR for recording.  
4
2
3
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
0
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.  
Press the [CD] input selector button.  
This selects the CD player as the audio source but  
leaves the camcorder as the video source.  
On your recorder, start record-  
ing.  
2
Start recording on the VCR, then start  
playback on the camcorder and CD player.  
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD  
player are recorded by the VCR.  
5
On the source component, start  
playback.  
3
Note:  
• If you select a different input source during recording,  
that input source will be recorded instead.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Onscreen Setup Menus  
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-  
nient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized  
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.  
Menu  
1.Input/Output Assign  
2.Speaker Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Source Setup  
5.ListeningMode Preset  
6.Miscellaneous  
7.Hardware Setup  
8.Lock Setup  
The onscreen menus shown in this manual may be slightly different from  
what you see on your TV.  
Menu Map  
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.  
Main menu  
Submenu  
pages 48–53  
Menu  
1.Input/Output Assign  
1.Input/Output Assign  
2.Speaker Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
1.Monitor Out  
2.HDMI Input  
3.Component Video Input  
4.Digital Input  
5.Analog Input  
4.Source Setup  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
6.Miscellaneous  
7.Hardware Setup  
8.Lock Setup  
6.Picture Quality  
page 54  
pages 101–107  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
page 111  
6.Miscellaneous  
2.OSD Setup  
3.12V Trigger  
4.12V Trigger  
5.12V Trigger  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
page 47  
page 97  
3.Audio Adjust  
page 60  
1.Tone Control  
2.Direct  
page 113  
3.Multiplex/Mono  
4.PL x/Neo:6  
5.Dolby EX  
6.Theater-Dimensional  
7.LFE Level  
7.Hardware Setup  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
6.Network  
pages 108–109  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
page 61  
page 115  
8.Lock Setup  
Lock  
Unlocked  
page 99  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
1.DVD  
2.VCR/DVR  
3.CBL/SAT  
4.GAME/TV  
5.AUX1  
6.AUX2  
7.TAPE  
8.TUNER  
9.CD  
10.PHONO  
11.NET/USB  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Listening Modes  
Direct Setting  
Audio Adjust  
Delay Enable  
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can  
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.  
DSD  
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)  
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,  
delay, etc., processing when the Direct listening mode is  
selected.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Receiver  
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.  
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.  
Multiplex/Mono Settings  
Multiplex  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3. Audio  
Adjust,and then press [Enter].  
]
2
Input Ch  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-  
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or  
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV  
broadcasts, and so on.  
Enter  
The Audio Adjust menu appears.  
3.Audio Adjust  
1.Tone Control  
2.Direct  
Main: The main channel is output (default).  
Sub: The sub channel is output.  
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out-  
put.  
3.Multiplex/Mono  
4.PL x/Neo:6  
5.Dolby EX  
6.Theater-Dimensional  
7.LFE Level  
Enter  
Mono  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
Input Ch  
3
4
This setting determines which channel is output when  
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output  
(default).  
L: Only the left channel is output.  
R: Only the right channel is output.  
Enter  
Output Speaker  
This setting determines which speakers output mono  
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
]
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right  
speakers.  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
The Audio Adjust menu items are  
explained below.  
]
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker  
Enter  
(default).  
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings  
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.  
Enter  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these  
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro  
Logic IIx.  
Panorama  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front  
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode.  
5
On: Panorama function on.  
Off: Panorama function off (default).  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dimension  
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting  
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward  
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The  
default value is 0. Lower settings move the sound field  
forward. Higher settings move it backward.  
Listening Angle  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-  
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front  
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.  
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-  
distant from the listening position and at an angle close  
to one of the two available settings.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
Center Width  
30˚  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound  
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a  
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by  
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center  
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to  
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-  
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center  
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center  
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default  
value is 3.  
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.  
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.  
LFE Level Settings  
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby  
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level  
can be set to –, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).  
Neo:6 Music  
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when  
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB  
or –dB.  
Center Image  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel  
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this  
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and  
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the  
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The  
default value is 2.  
Dolby Digital  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital  
sources.  
DTS  
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is  
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the  
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when  
the listening position is considerably off center. When  
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-  
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby TrueHD  
sources.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS-HD Master  
Audio sources.  
Dolby Digital Settings  
Dolby EX  
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-  
dled.  
DSD  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DSD sources.  
Multich PCM  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM  
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)  
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening  
mode.  
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
any of the listening modes compatible with this  
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
etc.).  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
Listening Mode Presets  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select “5. Listening  
Mode Preset,and then press  
[Enter].  
The Listening Mode Preset menu  
appears.  
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a  
default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-  
ported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then  
select the listening mode automatically depending on the  
format of the input signal. You can still select the other  
listening modes, although the default listening mode will  
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.  
Enter  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
1.DVD  
Enter  
2.VCR/DVR  
3.CBL/SAT  
4.GAME/TV  
5.AUX1  
6.AUX2  
7.TAPE  
8.TUNER  
9.CD  
10.PHONO  
11.NET/USB  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and then press [Enter].  
The audio formats supported by that  
input selector appear.  
]
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
3
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Enter  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
5-1.Listening Mode Preset DVD  
Analog/PCM  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
D.F.2ch  
D.F.Mono  
All Ch Stereo  
PL x Movie  
Neo:6  
PL x Movie  
Full Mono  
+
Enter  
Setup  
Enter  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
If the input selector is assigned to an  
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to  
select the audio formats shown on the  
following screen.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
5-1.Listening Mode Preset DVD  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Multich PCM  
192k/176.4k  
Dolby True HD  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DSD  
Multich  
Stereo  
Dolby TrueHD  
DTS-HD MSTR  
DSD  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
For the TUNER input selector, Analog  
is the only format available.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an audio for-  
]
4
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
tening mode.  
Only listening modes compatible with  
the audio format can be selected (see  
page 89).  
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for analog and PCM  
sources.  
Enter  
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.  
DTS: Specifies the default listening  
mode for DTS sources.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening  
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources  
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-  
tal or DTS.  
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-  
ing mode for mono sources in a digital  
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.  
Multich PCM: Specifies the default  
listening mode for multichannel PCM  
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via  
HDMI).  
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for high resolution  
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,  
such as DVD-Audio.  
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default  
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD  
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD  
(input via HDMI).  
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the  
default listening mode for DTS-HD  
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray  
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).  
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for DSD multichannel  
sources, such as SACD.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
Speaker Setup  
1
2
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.  
Receiver  
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the  
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
M
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
-
Prev  
CH  
2.Speaker Setup  
Display  
Muting  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Ln
Speaker Settings  
See “Speaker Settings” on page 47.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Config,and then press [Enter].  
]
3
4
Enter  
Speaker Configuration  
The Speaker Config screen appears.  
2-2.Speaker Config  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
Surr Back  
Surr Back Ch  
LPF of LFE  
Double Bass  
Yes  
Full Band  
100Hz  
100Hz  
100Hz  
2ch  
Enter  
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify  
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency  
for each speaker.  
120Hz  
On  
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:  
Full Band, 40 Hz, 45 Hz, 50 Hz, 55 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,  
80 Hz (THX), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 130 Hz,  
150 Hz, or 200 Hz.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
Enter  
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-  
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers  
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify  
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-  
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of  
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-  
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
Enter  
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify  
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Front,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Surr Back,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
5
8
Enter  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
crossover frequency.  
crossover frequency.  
If no surround back speakers are con-  
nected, select None.  
Note:  
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer  
(step 4) is set to No.  
Notes:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 47), Sur-  
round is set to None (step 7), or Pow-  
ered Zone 2 is being used  
(page 126).  
Enter  
Enter  
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround  
(step 7) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Center,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
6
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
9
If no center speaker is connected, select  
None.  
buttons to selectSurr Back Ch,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
1ch: Select if one surround back  
speaker is connected.  
Notes:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to BTL (page 47).  
Enter  
2ch: Select if two (left and right)  
surround back speakers are  
connected.  
• Cannot select Full Band if Front  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
Enter  
Note:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 47), Surr-  
Back is set to None (step 8), or Pow-  
ered Zone 2 is being used  
(page 126).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectSurround,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
7
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
If no surround left and right speakers  
are connected, select None.  
Continue with step 10 on the next page.  
Notes:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to BTL (page 47).  
Enter  
• Cannot select Full Band if Front  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel  
Double Bass  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of  
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be  
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to  
sources that use the LFE channel.  
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding  
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.  
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in  
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set  
to Full Band.  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select  
80 Hz (THX).  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off  
(THX).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
10  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Double Bass,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
11  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a low-  
Enter  
pass filter frequency.  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
The following low-pass filter frequen-  
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),  
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, or 120 Hz.  
Off(THX):The subwoofer only out-  
puts the LFE channel.  
On: In addition to LFE channel  
sounds, the subwoofer out-  
puts front left and right chan-  
nel bass sounds.  
Enter  
Enter  
Continue with step 11 in the next col-  
umn.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
12  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Distance  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectUnit,and then  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
]
Enter  
feet: Select if you want to enter  
distances in feet. Can be set  
from 0.2 to 30 feet in 0.2-foot  
steps.  
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the  
distance from each speaker to the listening position.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
meters: Select if you want to enter  
distances in meters. Can be  
set from 0.06 to 9 meters in  
0.06-meter steps.  
Enter  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a speaker, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to specify the distance.  
Specify the distance from the speaker  
to your listening position.  
]
]
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
2
3
Notes:  
Enter  
• The Center distance cannot be set if  
or Center is set to None in the  
Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
• The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-  
tances cannot be set if Speaker Type  
is set to BTL (page 47) or Surround  
uration (page 101).  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L  
Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL  
(page 47), Surr Back is set to None in  
the Speaker Configuration  
buttons to select3. Speaker Dis-  
tance,and then press [Enter].  
The Speaker Distance screen appears.  
Enter  
2-3.Speaker Distance  
(page 101), or Powered Zone 2 is  
being used (page 126).  
Unit  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
feet  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be  
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).  
Enter  
Repeat step 5 for each speaker.  
6
7
Note:  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
• Speakers that you set to No or None  
in the Speaker Configuration  
(page 101) cannot be selected.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Level Calibration  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a speaker, and  
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to  
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
]
Enter  
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the  
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so  
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-  
ing position.  
Repeat step 4 for each speaker  
so that the volume of the test  
tone from each speaker is the  
same.  
If you’re using a handheld sound level  
meter, adjust the level of each speaker  
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-  
ing position, measured with C-weight-  
ing and slow reading.  
Note:  
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,  
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-  
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful  
because the test tone will be much louder.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
Receiver  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Note:  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
]
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-  
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the [Test  
Tone] button to output the test tone. Use the [CH Sel]  
button to select each speaker, and use the [Level–] and  
[Level+] buttons to adjust the level.  
2
3
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-  
bration,and then press [Enter].  
The Level Calibration screen appears  
and the pink noise test tone is output by  
the front left speaker.  
Enter  
2-4.Level Calibration  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-15.0dB  
Enter  
Note:  
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-  
ers set to No or None in the Speaker  
Configuration (page 101).  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Equalizer Settings  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to set the “Equalizer”  
option to:  
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.  
Manual:The equalizer for each  
speaker can be set manually.  
Audyssey: The equalizer for each  
speaker is set automatically  
by the Automatic Speaker  
]
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Enter  
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of  
speakers individually with a 15-band equalizer. The vol-  
ume of each speaker can be set on page 105.  
Setup function.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
If you selected Manual, continue with  
the next step. If you selected Off or  
Audyssey, go to step 8.  
Receiver  
Use the Down [ ] button to  
select “Channel,and then use  
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the speaker.  
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-  
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.  
5
6
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
2
3
Enter  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select a frequency,  
and use the Left and Right  
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost  
that frequency.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
You can select: 25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz,  
100 Hz, 160 Hz, 250 Hz, 400 Hz,  
630 Hz, 1000 Hz, 1600 Hz, 2500 Hz,  
4000 Hz, 6300 Hz, 10000 Hz, or  
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,  
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or  
160 Hz.  
buttons to select “5. Equalizer  
Settings,and then press [Enter].  
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons move between the two screens.  
2-5.Equalizer Settings  
Enter  
Equalizer  
Channel  
25Hz  
Manual  
Front  
0dB  
Each band can be cut or boosted from  
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.  
40Hz  
0dB  
63Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,  
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,  
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.  
100Hz  
160Hz  
250Hz  
400Hz  
0dB  
2-5.Equalizer Settings  
630Hz  
1000Hz  
1600Hz  
2500Hz  
4000Hz  
6300Hz  
10000Hz  
16000Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up [ ] button to select  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
7
2
“Channel” again, and use the  
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select another speaker.  
Enter  
Enter  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
Enter  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
4
buttons to select “6.THX Audio  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
8
Enter  
2-6.THX Audio Setup  
Surr Back Sp Spacing  
THX Subwoofer  
BGC  
1ft-4ft  
Yes  
Off  
Enter  
Notes:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/  
192 kHz input signals.  
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp  
Spacing,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify  
the distance between your sur-  
round back speakers:  
Enter  
THX Audio Setup  
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if  
your surround back speakers are less  
than 1 foot (30 cm) apart.  
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-  
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Enter  
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your  
surround back speakers are between 1  
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.  
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify  
the distance between your surround back speakers.  
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX  
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s  
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the  
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners  
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).  
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your sur-  
round back speakers are more than 4  
Note:  
• This setting is only available if the  
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker  
Configuration is set to 2ch  
(page 102).  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
1
Receiver  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “THX Sub-  
woofer,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
No: Select this if you do not have  
a THX-certified subwoofer.  
]
Press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
5
2
3
Enter  
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-  
certified subwoofer.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
]
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Source Setup menu appears. The  
name of the currently selected input  
selector is displayed in a box.  
Enter  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
6
buttons to select “BGC,and use  
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
Enter  
Enter  
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.  
On: Select this to turn on BGC.  
Note:  
• This setting is only available if THX  
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
4
5
Enter  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
7
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
The Source Setup menu items are  
explained below.  
]
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
]
Enter  
Source Setup  
Enter  
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then use the  
1
Receiver  
input selector buttons to select  
an input source.  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
0
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Name Edit  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
You can enter a custom name for each individual input  
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When  
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.  
Select the input selector to which  
1
you want to give a custom name.  
To name a radio preset, use the [Tuner]  
button to select AM or FM, and then  
select the preset.  
IntelliVolume  
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each  
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your  
source components is louder or quieter than the others.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
2
Receiver  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to set the level.  
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use  
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s  
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase  
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from  
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Note:  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
]
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
3
4
A/V Sync  
Enter  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning  
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out  
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this  
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be  
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond  
steps.  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
Enter  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an  
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set the delay.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Name Edit,”  
and then press [Enter].  
]
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press  
[Enter].  
Enter  
The Name Edit screen appears.  
4-2.A/V Sync  
DVD  
4-3.Name Edit  
DVD  
A/V Sync  
(HDMI LipSync  
100msec  
60msec)  
Display  
Name  
Default  
Press Enter to see picture  
[
]
Enter  
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 114), and your  
TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed  
delay time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI  
Lip Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parenthe-  
ses.  
If you’re naming an item for the very  
first time, go to step 6.  
If the item already has a name, you can  
select Default or Custom in step 5.  
Note:  
• The A/V Sync function has no effect when the Direct  
listening mode is used with an analog input source.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Display,and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
Default: The default name is dis-  
played.  
]
9
5
Enter  
]
Custom:The custom name is dis-  
played.  
Enter  
Notes:  
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press  
[Enter] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.  
When Default is selected, the station’s  
frequency appears on the display when  
a radio preset is selected.  
You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS  
radio presets.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
tons.  
Press the Down [ ] button to  
select “Name,and then press  
[Enter] to open the character  
input screen.  
6
Enter  
Satellite Radio  
4-3.Name Edit  
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available  
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 114). See  
Name  
[
]
A B C D E F G H I J K L M  
Enter  
Q
d
N O P  
R S T U V W X Y Z  
g
a
c
e
j
o m  
b
f
h i  
k
n o p q  
u v w x y z  
r s t  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘  
SIRIUS Parental Lock  
_
( ) +  
= / , : ; ! ?  
OK  
*
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not  
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see  
page 114). See page 77 for more information.  
Cancel  
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
buttons to select a character, and  
then press [Enter].  
Repeat this step to enter up to 10  
characters.  
]
7
8
Enter  
To correct a character:  
1. Use the onscreen arrow  
tons to select the incorrect charac-  
ter.  
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
but-  
Enter  
]
buttons to select the correct charac-  
ter, and then press [Enter].  
When you’ve finished, use the  
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons  
to display the following screen,  
select “OK,and then press  
[Enter].  
Enter  
4-3.Name Edit  
Name  
[
]
Enter  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M  
Q
d
N O P  
R S T U V W X Y Z  
g
a
c
e
j
o m  
b
f
h i  
k
n o p q  
u v w x y z  
r s t  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘  
_
( ) +  
= / , : ; ! ?  
OK  
*
Cancel  
“OK”  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Miscellaneous Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
buttons to select an item, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.  
]
Enter  
1
The items are explained below.  
Ma
2
1
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
Enter  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
2
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Volume Setup  
Volume Display  
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level  
is displayed.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select  
]
“6. Miscellaneous,and then  
press [Enter].  
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,  
Max.  
Enter  
The Miscellaneous menu appears.  
Relative: Display range is –dB, –81.5 dB,  
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.  
6.Miscellaneous  
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value  
0 dB.  
1.Volume Setup  
2.OSD Setup  
3.12V Trigger  
4.12V Trigger  
5.12V Trigger  
Enter  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
Muting Level  
This setting determines how much the output is muted  
when the Muting function is used (see page 83). It can be  
set to –dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in  
10 dB steps.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
3
Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.  
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
Enter  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be each  
OSD Setup  
time the AV receiver is turned on.  
Immediate Display  
This setting determines whether operation details are  
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver  
function is used.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
On: Displayed (default).  
Off: Not displayed.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if  
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.  
Note:  
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher  
than the Maximum Volume setting.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that  
Immediate Display be turned off.  
Headphone Level  
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume  
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-  
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you  
usually use when listening through your speakers. The  
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.  
Monitor Type  
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your  
TV so that menus are displayed properly.  
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).  
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.  
Zone2 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 2.  
Display Position  
This setting determines where on the screen operation  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).  
Top: Top of the screen.  
TV Format  
See “TV Format Setup (not NorthAmerican models)” on  
page 60.  
Zone2 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.  
Language  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
onscreen setup menus.You can select: English, German,  
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
12V Trigger A/B/C Setup  
Zone3 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 3.  
See “Using the 12V Triggers” on page 130.  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
Zone3 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Hardware Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
5
buttons to select an item, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.  
]
Enter  
The items are explained below.  
Remote  
indicator  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
Number  
buttons  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Setup closes.  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Note:  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Remote Control  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Remote ID  
When several Integra/Onkyo components are used in the  
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To dif-  
ferentiate the AV receiver from the other components,  
you can change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or  
3. This setting changes the AV receiver’s remote ID.  
Playlist  
Random  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
Note:  
1
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure  
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see  
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with  
the remote controller.  
Receiver  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID  
While holding down the  
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the TV [Input] button.  
1
Receiver  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
The Remote indicator flashes four  
times.  
Enter  
TV  
Input  
7.Hardware Setup  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
Enter  
Use the number buttons to enter  
ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
2
6.Network  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
Enter  
The screen for that item appears.  
Zone 2 and Zone 3  
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 124.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Lip Sync  
Tuner  
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize  
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to  
the complex digital video processing being performed by  
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the  
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video  
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV  
receiver.  
AM Freq Step (on some models)  
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on  
page 61.  
Satellite Radio (on North American model)  
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold sep-  
arately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If  
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.  
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio  
Guide for more information.  
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.  
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.  
Notes:  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible  
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.  
Analog Multich  
You can check the amount of delay being applied by  
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen  
(see page 109).  
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity  
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their  
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.  
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-  
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that  
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV  
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.  
xvYCC  
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both  
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable  
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.  
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.  
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.  
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.  
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB  
or 15 dB setting.  
Control  
This function allows CEC-compatible components or  
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to  
be controlled with the AV receiver.  
HDMI  
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.  
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.  
HDMI Audio Out  
This setting determines whether audio received by an  
HDMI input is output by the HDMI outputs. You may  
want to change this setting to On if your TV is connected  
to an HDMI output and you want to listen to audio from  
an HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-  
mally, it should be set to Off.  
Notes:  
• HDMI control works only with the HDMI OUT  
MAIN jack, not the HDMI OUT SUB jack.  
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-  
ible or you’re not sure about its compatibility.  
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select  
Disable instead.  
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).  
On: HDMI audio is output.  
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV  
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through  
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the  
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output  
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV  
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-  
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV  
receiver’s volume.  
Notes:  
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the  
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its  
speakers.  
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to  
Auto.  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be  
output even if On is selected.  
Power Control  
• When the HDMIAudio Out setting is set to On, or TV  
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through  
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the  
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output  
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV  
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-  
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV  
receiver’s volume.  
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-  
nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via  
HDMI, select Enable.  
Disable: Power Control disabled.  
Enable: Power Control enabled.  
Notes:  
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the  
above Control setting is set to Enable.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Setup—Continued  
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-  
ible components that support it and may not work  
properly with some components due to their settings  
or compatibility.  
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more  
power.  
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready  
mode when set to Standby, and the Ready indicator  
lights up instead of the Standby indicator (not North  
American model). Also, the AV receiver’s AC outlets  
will be on all of the time regardless of whether the AV  
receiver is set to On or Standby, or Ready mode in this  
case.  
TV Control  
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHD-  
compatible TV connected via HDMI.  
Disable: TV Control disabled.  
Enable: TV Control enabled.  
Notes:  
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re  
note sure about its compatibility.  
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above  
Control and Power Control settings are both set to  
Enable.  
Note:  
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV  
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-  
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the  
Network  
See “Network Settings” on page 122.  
Lock Setup  
Lock  
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-  
ing the setup menus.  
Locked: Setup menus locked.  
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.  
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can  
be accessed.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Net/USB  
WAV les must have a “.wav” or “.WAV” filename  
extension.  
About Net/USB  
The AV receiver is network-ready, which means you can  
hook it up to your home network with a standard Ether-  
net cable and enjoy the music files stored on your com-  
puter or media server. If your network is connected to the  
Internet, you can also enjoy Internet radio.  
Net/USB can also be used to play music files stored on  
USB mass storage devices (e.g., USB flash drives and  
MP3 players), which can be plugged into the AV  
receiver’s front panel USB port.  
M4A  
M4A stands for MPEG-4 Audio.  
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and  
bit rates of between 16 and 320 kbps are supported.  
Incompatible files cannot be played.  
Variable bit rate (VBR) files are supported. (Playing  
times may not display correctly.)  
• M4A files must have a “.m4a” or “.M4A” filename  
extension.  
Internet Radio  
USB Mass Storage Device Requirements  
With Internet radio you can:  
• Listen to Internet radio stations from around the  
world.  
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support  
the USB mass storage device class.  
• Playback may not be possible with some USB devices  
even if they conform to the USB mass storage device  
class.  
• Select stations by entering the appropriate URL with  
the remote controller, or connect to the AV receiver  
from your computer and enter the URL with your Web  
browser.  
• USB devices formatted with the FAT16 or FAT32 file  
system are supported.  
• Preset up to 20 Internet radio stations.  
• If the storage device has been partitioned, only music  
files in the first partition can be played.  
Supported Audio File Formats  
For server and USB mass storage device playback, the  
AV receiver supports the following music file formats:  
MP3, WMA, WAV, and M4A (MPEG-4 Audio).  
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and  
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep.  
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-  
puts when playing music files.  
MP3  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not  
supported.  
• MP3 files must be MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3 format  
with a sampling rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz  
and a bit rate of between 32 kbps and 320 kbps.  
Incompatible files cannot be played.  
Server Requirements  
Variable bit rate (VBR) MP3 files are supported.  
(Playing times may not display correctly.)  
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on a  
computer or media server and supports the following  
technologies:  
• MP3 files must have a “.mp3” or “.MP3” filename  
extension.  
®
• Windows Media Player 11  
®
• Windows Media Connect 2.0  
WMA  
®
• UPnP AV-compatible media server  
• DLNA-compatible media server  
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an  
®
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft  
®
®
Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA format by  
Windows Media Player 11 and Windows Media Con-  
nect 2.0 can be downloaded for free from the Microsoft  
®
®
using Windows Media Player.  
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.  
Web site.  
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz and bit  
rates of between 48 kbps and 320 kbps, and lossless  
DRM are supported. Incompatible files cannot be  
played.  
• The computer or media server must be on the same  
network as the AV receiver.  
• Each folder may contain up to 500 music files, and  
folders may be nested up to eight levels deep. (The  
actual number of files and folder levels depends on the  
media server being used.)  
Variable bit rates (VBR) are supported. (Playing times  
may display incorrectly with VBR.)  
• WMA files must have a “.wma” or “.WMA” filename  
extension.  
• Digital audio signals are not output by the digital out-  
puts when playing music files.  
• In some cases, even if these requirements are met,  
playback may not work properly due to the configura-  
tion of the server.  
WAV  
WAV les contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.  
• Sampling rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz and  
bit rates of 16 kbps are supported. Incompatible files  
cannot be played.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Net/USB—Continued  
Notes:  
Minimum system requirements for Windows  
Media Player 11 (for Windows XP)  
®
®
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your  
able to access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have  
any problems with your Internet connection.  
Operating system  
Windows® XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows® XP Profes-  
sional (SP2), Windows® XP Tablet PC Edition (SP2), Update  
Rollup 2 for Windows® XP Media Center Edition 2005  
(KB900325), October 2006 Update Rollup for Windows®  
XP Media Center Edition (KB925766)  
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network  
settings automatically. If you want to configure these  
settings manually, see page 122.  
Processor:  
233 MHz Intel® Pentium ®II,  
Advanced Micro Devices (AMD), etc.  
64 MB  
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so  
must use a PPPoE-compatible router.  
Memory:  
Hard disk:  
Drive:  
200 MB of free space  
CD or DVD drive  
28.8 kbps  
16-bit sound card  
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a  
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your computer is  
configured to use a proxy server, use the same settings  
for the AV receiver (see page 122).  
Modem:  
Sound card:  
Monitor:  
Video card:  
Software:  
Super VGA (800 x 600)  
64 MB VRAM, DirectX® 9.0b  
Microsoft® ActiveSync® (only when  
using a Windows Mobile®-based  
Pocket PC or smartphone)  
Connecting the AV Receiver  
®
Web browser:  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6 or  
To connect the AV receiver to your home network, plug  
one end of a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable into the AV  
receiver’s ETHERNET port, and plug the other end into  
a LAN port on your router or switch.  
Netscape 7.1  
Network Requirements  
The following diagram shows how you can connect the  
AV receiver to your home network. In this example, it’s  
connected to a LAN port on a router, which has a 4-port  
100Base-TX switch built-in.  
Ethernet Network  
The AV receiver’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For  
best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet network is  
recommended. Although it’s possible to play music on a  
computer that’s connected to the network wirelessly,  
playback may be unreliable, so wired connections are  
recommended.  
DTR-8.8  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
S
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENT
NTER SURR  
S
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SUR
Ethernet Router  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
ZONE2  
L
Internet  
radio  
OUT  
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-  
ing IP addresses.Your router must support the following:  
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-  
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-  
taneously via a single Internet connection. The AV  
receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.  
ETHERNET  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
Modem  
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).  
DHCP supplies IP addresses to network devices,  
allowing them to configure themselves automatically.  
WAN port  
Router  
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-  
mended.  
LAN port  
LAN port  
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs  
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your  
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
CAT5 Ethernet cable  
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to  
connect the AV receiver to your home network.  
LAN/Ethernet port  
Internet Access (for Internet radio)  
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must  
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection  
(e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory  
results, so a broadband connection is strongly recom-  
mended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please  
consult your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
Computer or media server  
The AV receiver’s NETWORK indicator lights up when  
the AV receiver is connected to the network. It flashes if  
a connection cannot be established.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Net/USB—Continued  
Playing Music Files on a Server  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
6
buttons to select a music file,and  
press the [Enter] or Play [ ] but-  
ton to start playback.  
Playback starts and the following  
screen appears.  
This section explains how to play music files on a com-  
puter or media server through the AV receiver. See  
page 116 for details on supported music servers and  
music file formats.  
Enter  
Start your computer or media  
server.  
1
PLAY  
My favorite Album  
4/125  
Artist name  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Net/USB] Input Selector button  
My favorite song 1  
2
Enter  
00:10  
04:35  
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz  
Receiver  
to select the Server screen.  
RETURN  
or  
To return to the previous menu during  
playback, press the [Return] button.  
To stop playback, press the Stop [ ]  
button.  
Server  
1/2  
Server1: Shared1  
server: MYPC  
Net/USB  
0
To select the next song, press the Next  
[
] button. To select the beginning of  
the current song, press the Previous  
] button. To select the previous  
[
Press the [Net/USB] Remote  
Mode button to select the  
Net/USB remote controller mode.  
song, press the Previous [  
twice.  
] button  
3
4
Net/USB  
Random Playback  
To play songs in random order, while playback is  
stopped, press the [Random] button. All of the songs in  
the current folder will be played in random order. When  
all of the songs in the folder have been played once,  
they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To  
cancel random playback, stop playback or return to the  
song list.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a server, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
Enter  
A list of items on the server appears.  
Server1: Shared1  
1/10  
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.  
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are  
not included in random playback.  
Recently Added  
Artists  
Album  
Songs  
Genre  
Enter  
Year  
Repeat Playback  
Rating  
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY  
screen is displayed.  
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while  
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button  
repeatedly to select: ONE, FOLDER, ALL, or Off.  
In ONE mode, the current song is played repeatedly.  
In FOLDER mode, all of the songs in the current folder  
are played repeatedly.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [Enter].  
]
5
Enter  
A list of music files appears.  
All Music  
1/125  
Song 1  
Song 2  
Song 3  
My favorite song 1  
My favorite song 2  
My favorite song 3  
My favorite song 4  
My favorite song 5  
My favorite song 6  
My favorite song 7  
In ALL mode, all of the songs on the current server are  
played repeatedly.  
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button  
repeatedly to select Off.  
Enter  
Note:  
• If the message “No server” appears, this means that no  
information can be retrieved from the server. In this  
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver  
connections.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Net/USB—Continued  
®
Windows Media Player 11 Setup  
Playing Music Files on a USB Device  
®
This section explains how to configureWindows Media  
Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the music files  
stored on your computer.  
This section explains how to play music files on a USB  
mass storage device. See page 116 for details on sup-  
ported USB mass storage devices and music file formats.  
®
1
Start Windows Media Player 11.  
1
On the Library menu, select Media Shar-  
ing.  
2
The Media Sharing dialog box appears.  
Select the Share my media check box,  
and then click OK.  
3
A list of supported devices appears.  
4
Select the AV receiver in the list, and  
then click Allow.  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
9
4
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Net/USB  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Click OK to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 11  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
5
Remote Mode  
®
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
configuration.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
You can now play the music files in your Win-  
®
dows Media Player 11 library through the AV  
+
Enter  
CH  
receiver (see page 118).  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Note:  
Display  
Muting  
®
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for  
free from the Microsoft Web site.  
®
aylist  
Random  
Plug your USB mass storage  
device into the AV receiver’s USB  
port.  
1
2
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Net/USB] Input Selector button  
repeatedly to select the USB  
screen.  
Receiver  
USB  
USB Storage  
1/1  
Net/USB  
0
USB indicator  
The USB indicator lights up if the AV  
receiver is able to read the USB mass  
storage device. It flashes if it cannot  
read it.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Net/USB—Continued  
Random playback supports up to 9,999 songs per folder.  
If a folder contains more than this, songs over 9,999 are  
not included in random playback.  
Press the [Net/USB] Remote  
Mode button to select the  
Net/USB remote controller mode.  
3
4
Net/USB  
Repeat Playback  
The Repeat function can only be set while the PLAY  
screen is displayed.  
To play songs repeatedly, during playback (or while  
playback is paused or stopped), press the [Repeat] button  
repeatedly to select: ONE, FOLDER, ALL, or Off.  
In ONE mode, the current song is played repeatedly.  
In FOLDER mode, all of the songs in the current folder  
are played repeatedly.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a USB mass  
storage device, and then press  
[Enter].  
A list of the device’s contents appears.  
]
Enter  
USB Storage  
1/15  
In ALL mode, all of the songs on the USB mass storage  
device (in the same partition) are played repeatedly.  
To cancel repeat playback, press the [Repeat] button  
repeatedly to select Off.  
Folder1  
Folder2  
Enter  
01_Song_Track1.WMA  
02_Song_Track2.WMA  
03_Song_Track3.WMA  
04_Song_Track4.WMA  
05_Song_Track5.WMA  
06_Song_Track6.WMA  
07_Song_Track7.WMA  
08_Song_Track8.WMA  
Notes:  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV  
receiver’s USB port, we recommend that you use its  
AC adapter to power it.  
To open a folder, use the Up and Down  
]/[ ] buttons to select it, and then  
press [Enter].  
[
• The operation of hard disk drives that draw their  
power from the AV receiver’s USB port cannot be  
guaranteed.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
5
buttons to select a music file,and  
press the [Enter] or Play [ ] but-  
ton to start playback.  
Playback starts and the following  
screen appears.  
• Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB  
port on your computer. Music on your computer can-  
not be played through the AV receiver in this way.  
Enter  
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that sup-  
port the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which  
allows USB storage devices to be connected to com-  
puters without the need for special drivers or software.  
Note that not all USB MP3 players support the USB  
Mass Storage Class standard. Refer your USB MP3  
player’s instruction manual for details.  
PLAY  
4/15  
USB Storage  
02_Song_Track2.WMA  
--:--:--  
00:10  
Enter  
WMA 160kbps 16bit/44.1kHz  
RETURN  
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot  
be played.  
or  
To return to the previous menu during  
playback, press the [Return] button.  
To stop or pause playback, press the  
Stop [ ] or Pause [ ] button, respec-  
tively.  
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the  
loss or damage to data stored on a USB mass storage  
device when that device is used with the AV receiver.  
We recommend that you back up your important  
music files beforehand.  
To select the next song, press the Next  
[
] button. To select the beginning of  
the current song, press the Previous  
] button. To select the previous  
• When you connect a USB MP3 player to the AV  
receiver, what’s shown on the AV receiver’s display  
may not match what’s shown on the MP3 player’s dis-  
play. Also, song management functions used by some  
MP3 players, such as song genre, sort, additional  
information, etc., cannot be used with the AV receiver.  
[
song, press the Previous [  
twice.  
] button  
Random Playback  
• Operation with all USB mass storage devices includ-  
ing the ability to power them is not guaranteed.  
To play songs in random order, while playback is  
stopped, press the [Random] button. All of the songs in  
the current folder will be played in random order. When  
all of the songs in the folder have been played once,  
they’ll all be played again in a different random order. To  
cancel random playback, stop playback or return to the  
song list.  
• Do not connect your USB mass storage device via a  
USB hub. The USB mass storage device must be con-  
nected directly to the AV receiver’s USB port.  
• If the USB mass storage device contains a lot of data,  
the AV receiver make take a while to read it.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Net/USB—Continued  
• Song ID information, such as album name, artist, etc.,  
cannot be displayed on the AV receiver.  
Press the [Net/USB] Remote  
Mode button to select the  
Net/USB remote controller mode.  
2
3
• The total playing time cannot be displayed on the AV  
receiver.  
Net/USB  
• Playback from a memory card that’s inserted in a USB  
card reader may not work properly.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• Depending on the USB mass storage device, issues  
such as not being able to read the device’s contents  
properly, and not being able to supply power properly  
may occur.  
buttons to select an empty item,  
and then press the [Setup] but-  
ton.  
Enter  
The URL Input screen appears.  
Listening to Internet Radio  
To receive Internet radio, you must connect the AV  
receiver to a network with Internet access (see  
page 117).  
You can select Internet radio stations by entering the  
appropriate URL with the remote controller, or by con-  
necting to the AV receiver from your computer and  
entering the URL with your Web browser.  
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are sup-  
ported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,  
depending on the type of data or audio format used by  
the Internet radio station, you may not be able to listen to  
some stations.  
Use the remote controller to  
enter the URL of the Internet  
radio station you want to listen  
to.  
Use the same method as for the Name  
Edit function on page 109 to enter a  
URL.  
When you’ve finished, select  
“OK,and then press [Enter].  
To update the station list, press  
the [Return] button.  
4
AUX 1  
5
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
The station appears in the list.  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Net/USB  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
OR:  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
On your computer, start your  
Web browser and enter the AV  
receiver’s IP address in the  
browser’s Internet address (URL)  
field.  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
+
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
The browser connects to the AV  
receiver and displays the same screen  
as the AV receiver.  
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
URL with your browser.  
ylist  
Random  
Notes:  
• The AV receiver’s IP address is  
shown on the Network screen (see  
page 122).  
Press the [Net/USB] Input Selec-  
tor button repeatedly to select  
the Internet Radio screen.  
1
Net/USB  
• If you’re using DHCP, your router  
may not always allocate the same IP  
address to the AV receiver, so if you  
find that you can’t connect to the AV  
receiver, recheck the AV receiver’s  
IP address on Network screen.  
0
Internet Radio  
1/20  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
<no item>  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Net/USB—Continued  
Network Settings  
Press [Enter].  
The station’s programs are displayed.  
5
This section explains how to configure the AV receiver’s  
network settings manually.  
Enter  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t need  
to change any of these settings, as the AV receiver is set  
use DHCP to configure itself automatically by default  
(i.e., DHCP is set to Enable). If, however, your router’s  
DHCP server is disabled, for example, you’re using  
static IP addresses, you’ll need to configure these set-  
tings yourself, in which case, a knowledge of Ethernet  
networking is essential.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a program, and  
then press [Enter].  
Playback starts and the following  
screen appears.  
]
6
Enter  
What’s DHCP?  
PLAY  
1/45  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used  
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other devices  
to automatically configure themselves on a network.  
Enter  
iRadio station name  
Streaming program name  
--:--:--  
01:29  
MP3 128kbps 16bit/44.1kHz  
What’s DNS?  
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain  
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a  
domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in your Web  
browser, before accessing the site, your browser uses  
DNS to translate this into an IP address, in this case  
63.148.251.142.  
RETURN  
Once you’ve added a station to the list, simply select it  
on the Internet Radio screen, and then press [Enter] to  
start playback.  
Notes:  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• When connected to an Internet radio station that uses  
the MP3 streaming format, the MP3 indicator lights  
up. When connected to an Internet radio station that  
uses the WMA streaming format, the WMA indicator  
lights up.  
1
Receiver  
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,  
56K modem or ISDN), depending on the station,  
Internet radio may not work satisfactorily. For best  
results, use a broadband connection (e.g., cable  
modem, xDSL modem, etc).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
7.Hardware Setup  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
Enter  
6.Network  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Net/USB—Continued  
Disable: Control over the network disabled.  
Port  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select “6. Network,”  
and then press [Enter].  
3
This is the network port used for control over the net-  
Enter  
work.  
The Network screen appears.  
7-6.Network  
DHCP  
MAC Adress  
Control  
Port  
00:00:00-00:00:00  
Disable  
---  
This setting determines whether or not the AV receiver  
uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings.  
Enable: DHCP enabled.  
Enter  
Disable: DHCP disabled.  
If you select Disable, you must configure the IPAddress,  
Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings your-  
self.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select the settings,  
and use the Left and Right  
]
4
5
Enter  
IP Address  
[
]/[ ] buttons to set them.  
To enter an IP address, select the set-  
ting, and then press [Enter]. The arrow  
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify  
an IP address. Enter a static IP address provided by your  
ISP.  
The IP address must be within the following ranges.  
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255  
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255  
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can then be  
used to enter numbers. Press [Enter]  
again to set the number.  
The settings are explained below.  
When you’ve finished, use the Up  
and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select “Save Settings,and then  
press [Enter].  
Enter  
Subnet Mask  
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify  
a subnet mask address.  
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP  
(typically: 255.255.255.0).  
7-6.Network  
Proxy  
Proxy URL  
Enable  
8080  
Enter  
Proxy Port  
Save Settings  
Gateway  
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify  
a gateway address.  
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
6
Setup closes.  
DNS Server  
If you set the DHCP setting to Disable, you must specify  
a DNS server.  
Enter the DNS server addresses provided by your ISP.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Proxy URL  
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.  
Proxy Port  
Mac Address  
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port number  
here.  
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access Control)  
address. This address cannot be changed.  
Control  
This setting enables or disables control over the network.  
Enable: Control over the network enabled.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Zone 2 and Zone 3  
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2  
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.  
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers to an  
Amp in Zone 2  
Connecting Zone 2  
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:  
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-  
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.  
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,  
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.  
with a different source in each room.  
Hookup  
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers Directly  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input  
to the AV receiver  
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main  
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a  
different source in each room. This is called Powered  
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV  
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,  
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.  
on your Zone 2 amp.  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 2 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a  
powered subwoofer in Zone 2.  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your Zone 2 amp.  
Hookup  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.  
Main room  
Main room  
TV  
TV  
AV receiver  
AV receiver  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
2
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
S
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
O
I
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
URR SURR BACK FRNT CNTER SURR  
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
T
APE  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHON
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
2
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
SW  
L
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
CR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
R
ZONE2 R  
ZONE2 L  
PRE OUT  
Zone 2  
Zone 2  
LINE INPUT  
R
L
IN  
R
L
Powered  
subwoofer  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
You must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act  
(Activated) to use this setup (see page 126).  
Note:  
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be  
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-  
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so  
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver  
(see page 127).  
Note:  
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the  
AV receiver.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Zone 2 Video Outputs  
Connecting Zone 3  
The AV receiver features a composite video output and  
component video output for connection to a TV in Zone 2,  
so you can enjoy both audio and video in that zone.  
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.  
ConnectingYour Zone 3 Speakers  
Hookup  
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and a  
different source to those selected for your main room and  
Zone 2.  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV  
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video  
input on your Zone 2 TV.  
Hookup  
• Alternatively, use a component video cable to connect  
the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT jacks to a component video input  
on your Zone 2 TV.  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input  
on your Zone 3 amp.  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 3 PRE OUT SW jack to the line input on a pow-  
ered subwoofer in Zone 3.  
Main room  
TV  
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker terminals  
on your Zone 3 amp.  
Main room  
AV receiver  
TV  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
2
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
T
APE  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
MONITOR OUT  
2
ZONE 2  
OUT  
/ZONE  
2
OUT  
AV receiver  
or  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
ETHERNET  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
2
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
SW  
L
S
S
O
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
F
R
O
N
T
C
E
N
T
E
R
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
S
U
R
R
B
A
C
K
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
T
APE  
AUX  
1
G
A
M
E
/
T
V
C
B
L
/
S
A
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ONE2  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
ZONE 3  
SW  
L
Zone 2  
TV  
R
PRE OUT  
• If you use the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, you must set the Monitor Out2  
setting to Zone 2 (see page 48).  
Zone 3  
LINE INPUT  
Notes:  
IN  
Powered  
subwoofer  
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-  
nents connected to composite video inputs and S-Video  
inputs.  
R
L
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
• The COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR  
OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT outputs video from components  
connected to component video inputs.  
Note:  
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be  
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-  
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so  
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver  
(see page 127).  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Powered Zone 2 Setting  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/  
Zone 3,and then press [Enter].  
]
3
4
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV  
receiver, as explained in “ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speak-  
ers Directly to theAV receiver” on page 124, you must set  
the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).  
Enter  
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.  
7-2.Zone2/Zone3  
Powered Zone2  
Zone2 Out  
Not Act  
Fixed  
Zone3 Out  
Fixed  
Enter  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Powered  
Zone 2,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
NotAct: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals not activated (Powered  
Zone 2 disabled).  
]
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Enter  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals activated (Powered Zone  
2 enabled).  
+
Enter  
Enter  
Setup  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
aylist  
Random  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
1
2
Notes:  
Receiver  
• When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2  
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals output sound, but the surround back speakers con-  
nected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do  
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the  
surround back speakers output sound as normal.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings  
Press the [Setup] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to  
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or  
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you  
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV  
receiver.  
Note:  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [Setup], [Enter], and arrow but-  
tons.  
1
Mode button, followed by the  
[Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Receiver  
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3  
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
Tone  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
4
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [Enter].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Enter  
Enter  
,
Off  
Level  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/  
]
Standby  
On  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Zone 3,and then press [Enter].  
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.  
Input  
Enter  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Input  
4
7-2.Zone2/Zone3  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Selector  
Powered Zone2  
Zone2 Out  
Not Act  
Fixed  
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
Zone3 Out  
Fixed  
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Enter  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Zone3  
Zone2  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to selectZone 2 Outor  
“Zone 3 Out,and use the Left  
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select:  
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume  
must be set on the amp in that  
zone.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
-
Prev  
CH  
Muting  
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-  
ume can be set on the AV  
receiver.  
Enter  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Level–,  
Level+  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-  
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for  
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for  
Zone 3.  
Selecting an Input Source for Zones  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button.  
1
Remote  
controller  
The [Zone2] or [Zone3] Remote Mode  
button lights up.  
Zone  
3
2
Turning Off Zones  
Zone  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button.  
The [Zone2] or [Zone3] Remote Mode  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes,  
and the input selector currently selected  
for the zone appears on the display.  
1
AV receiver  
Remote  
controller  
Zone  
3
2
button lights up.  
Zone  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
The Zone 2 or Zone 3 indicator flashes.  
AV receiver  
On the remote controller, use the  
Input Selector buttons.  
2
Remote  
The input source is selected, the zone is  
turned on, and the Zone 2 or Zone 3  
indicator lights continuously.  
controller  
DVD  
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
Game  
4
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
/
TV  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
On the AV receiver, use the input  
selector buttons, or press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button  
repeatedly  
The input source is selected, the zone is  
turned on, the name of the input selec-  
tor appears on the display, and the Zone  
2 or Zone 3 indicator lights continu-  
ously.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Standby] button.  
2
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
0
Remote  
controller  
Standby  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Off] button.  
AV receiver  
The zone is turned off, and the Zone 2  
or Zone 3 indicator goes off.  
AV receiver  
Notes:  
• To select AM or FM, press the [Tuner] input selector  
button repeatedly. On the North American model, you  
can also select XM or SIRIUS.  
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and  
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no  
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check  
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes  
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as  
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,  
are unavailable.  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/  
Standby and Direct Change  
work.  
functions do not  
You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations  
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same  
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Adjusting the Volume of Zones  
Muting Zones  
Remote  
controller  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button, and then use the  
[Level–] and [Level+] buttons.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Zone 2] or [Zone 3] Remote  
Mode button, and then press the  
[Muting] button.  
Zone  
3
2
Zone  
3
2
Zone  
Zone  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button, and  
then use the Level Up and Down  
To unmute a zone, on the remote  
controller, press the [Zone 2] or  
[Zone 3] Remote Mode button,  
and then press the [Muting] but-  
ton again.  
Level  
-
Level+  
Muting  
[
]/[ ] buttons.  
AV receiver  
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[Zone 2] button.  
1
AV receiver  
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]  
button repeatedly to select Bass  
or Treble.  
2
3
Adjusting the Balance of Zones  
On the AV receiver, press the  
1
[Zone 2] or [Zone 3] button.  
AV receiver  
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus  
[–] buttons to adjust the bass or  
treble.  
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble  
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Press the AV receiver’s [Tone]  
button repeatedly to select Bal-  
ance.  
2
3
Use the Tone Plus [+] and Minus  
[–] buttons to adjust the balance.  
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the  
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB  
to the left in 2 dB steps.  
Notes:  
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.  
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.  
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no  
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out  
setting is set to Fixed (page 127).  
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect  
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-  
ting is set to Fixed (page 127).  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Using the 12V Triggers  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select “12V Trigger A,  
B, or C,and then press [Enter].  
The 12V Trigger A/B/C Setup screen  
appears.  
The 12V triggersA, B, and C can be used to turn on 12V  
trigger-capable components automatically when they are  
selected as the input source. The triggers can be set so  
that they activate when a connected component is  
selected as the input source for the main room, Zone 2,  
Zone 3, or any combination of rooms.  
Enter  
6-x.12V Trigger x Setup  
Delay  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
TV/GAME  
AUX1  
AUX2  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
NET/USB  
1sec  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
Main/Zone2  
When triggered, the output from a 12V TRIGGER OUT  
goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliamperes max).  
Enter  
C
12V TRIGGER OUT  
A
B
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
OUT  
OUT  
SUB  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
MAIN  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR OUT  
/ZONE OUT  
2
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
2
3
2
1
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
V
B
C
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER OUT  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
SW  
L
S
S
OUT  
A
B
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK  
VCR/DVR)  
4
5
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
buttons to selectDelay,and use  
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select: 0 sec, 1 sec, 2 sec,  
or 3 sec.  
When 0 sec is selected, the trigger sig-  
nal is output as soon as the input source  
is changed.  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
Enter  
Hookup  
• Use a miniplug cable to connect the AV receiver’s 12V  
TRIGGER OUT A, B, or C jack to the 12 V trigger  
input on a connected component.  
Enter  
When several components are turned on simultaneously  
by using triggers A, B, and C, depending on the type of  
components, a large amount of current may be drawn  
momentarily. To prevent this, you can delay trigger sig-  
nals A, B, and C individually. Another application for  
trigger delay is eliminating the “thump” noise that’s  
sometimes heard when a source component is turned on.  
Delaying the trigger signal for your power amplifier so  
that it’s the last component to be turned on will accom-  
plish this.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input source,  
and use the Left and Right  
]
Enter  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select an  
option.  
Off: No trigger signal is output.  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button, followed by the  
1
A 12-volt trigger signal is output when  
the connected component is selected as  
the source for:  
Receiver  
[Setup] button.  
Enter  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Main: Main room.  
Zone2: Zone 2.  
Main/Z2: Main room or Zone 2.  
Zone3: Zone 3.  
Main/Z3: Main room or Zone 3.  
Z2/Z3: Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
Main/Z2/Z3: Main room, Zone 2, or  
Zone 3.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select  
“6. Miscellaneous,and then  
press [Enter].  
]
2
Enter  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Setup] button.  
6
The Miscellaneous menu appears.  
Setup closes.  
6.Miscellaneous  
1.Volume Setup  
2.OSD Setup  
3.12V Trigger  
4.12V Trigger  
5.12V Trigger  
Enter  
A
B
C
Setup  
Setup  
Setup  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet  
Using the Remote Controller in  
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals  
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV  
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.  
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits  
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller  
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-  
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each  
zone.  
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line  
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when  
it’s installed inside a cabinet.  
IR IN  
A or B  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3  
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the  
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds  
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the  
connecting block.  
Inside  
cabinet  
Remote controller  
Signal flow  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other  
Components  
IR IN  
A or B  
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV  
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other  
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals  
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack are fed  
through to the other component via the IR emitter. Sig-  
nals picked up by the AV receiver’s remote control sen-  
sor are not output.  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
Remote controller  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
Main room  
Zone 2/3  
block  
Signal flow  
IR IN  
A or B  
AV receiver  
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be  
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN A or B jack, as  
shown below. The IR IN A and B jacks are identical. Up  
to two IR receivers can be connected.  
IR OUT  
IR Emitter  
Remote controller  
Other component  
From the connecting block  
Miniplug cable  
Signal flow  
IR  
A
B
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s  
IR OUT jack, as shown below.  
IN  
OUT  
AV receiver  
Miniplug cable  
Other component  
Remote control  
sensor  
Emitter  
IR  
A
B
IN  
Miniplug  
IR Emitter  
OUT  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components  
You can control your other components, including those  
This section explains how to:  
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button to which you want  
to enter the code, press the  
[Standby] button.  
2
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD/Dock  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
• Learn commands directly from another component’s  
remote controller (see page 135).  
• Program the Macro buttons to perform a sequence of  
up to eight remote control actions (see page 136).  
Standby  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
To control another component, you must first enter that  
component’s remote control code to a Remote Mode but-  
ton. You’ll need to enter a code for each component that  
you want to control.  
Within 30 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit  
remote control code.  
3
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
AUX 2  
6
Game  
4
/TV  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
Remote  
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
8
indicator  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
Net/USB  
0
TV  
Input  
TV  
I
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
Number  
buttons  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Press the Remote Mode button  
again to select the remote con-  
troller mode, point the remote  
controller at the component, and  
check the operation.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
4
11  
12  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
Remote  
Mode  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
If the remote controller doesn’t work as  
expected, and several remote codes are  
listed, try each one in turn and use the  
one that works best.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
Prev  
CH  
Display  
Muting  
Notes:  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the  
[Receiver], [Zone 2], [Zone 3], and [Net/USB]  
Remote Mode buttons.  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the  
time of printing but subject to change.  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
• The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode buttons are  
preprogrammed for use with Integra/Onkyo DVD  
players and CD players, respectively.  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-688M  
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or  
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control  
code to the [CD] Remote Mode button.  
Look up the component’s remote  
control code in the separate  
Remote Control Codes list.  
1
The codes are organized by category.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Note:  
• If you connect an  
Remote Control Codes for Integra/Onkyo  
Components Connected via  
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD  
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-  
ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display  
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 52).  
Integra/Onkyo components that are connected via  
are controlled by pointing the remote controller at the  
AV receiver, not the component. This allows you to con-  
trol components that are out of view, in a rack, for exam-  
ple.  
Resetting the Remote Mode Buttons  
You can reset a Remote Mode button to its default  
remote control code.  
Make sure the Integra/Onkyo component  
1
is connected with an  
cable and an  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button that you want to  
analog audio cable (RCA).  
See page 45 for details.  
1
Remote Mode  
reset, press the TV [  
] button.  
DVD  
VCR  
The Remote indicator flashes three  
times.  
CD  
TV  
Enter the appropriate remote control code  
to the Remote Mode button.  
2
CDR/MD/Dock  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
• [DVD] Remote Mode button  
5002: Integra/Onkyo DVD player with  
TV  
• [CD] Remote Mode button  
6002: Integra/Onkyo CD player with  
• [MD] Remote Mode button  
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with  
Press the Remote Mode button  
again.  
2
• [CDR] Remote Mode button  
Remote Mode  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
indicating that the button has been  
reset.  
DVD  
VCR  
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with  
CD  
TV  
• [Dock] Remote Mode button  
CDR/MD/Dock  
6004: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A1 with  
See the previous page for how to enter remote  
control codes.  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
The [DVD] and [CD] Remote Mode  
buttons are preprogrammed with  
remote control codes for controlling  
Integra/Onkyo DVD players and CD  
players, respectively. When these but-  
tons are reset, the preprogrammed  
codes are restored.  
Press the Remote Mode button, point the  
remote controller at the AV receiver, and  
operate the component.  
3
If you want to control an Integra/Onkyo component by  
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you want  
to control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not con-  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
nected via  
, use the following remote control codes:  
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.  
• [DVD] Remote Mode button  
While holding down the  
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the [Standby] button.  
The Remote indicator flashes five  
times.  
5001: Integra/Onkyo DVD player without  
1
(default)  
Receiver  
• [CD] Remote Mode button  
6001: Integra/Onkyo CD player without  
(default)  
Standby  
• [MD] Remote Mode button  
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without  
• [CDR] Remote Mode button  
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without  
Press the [Receiver] Remote  
Mode button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
2
• [Dock] Remote Mode button  
Receiver  
6003: Onkyo RI Dock DS-A2 without  
(default)  
indicating that the remote controller  
has been reset.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select  
the appropriate remote controller mode with the Remote Mode buttons first.) With some components, certain buttons  
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
Controlling a TV  
Controlling a VCR  
Controlling a Satellite or  
Cable Receiver  
Press [VCR] first  
Press [Cable] (SAT) first  
Press [TV] first  
On  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
On  
Standby  
TV  
TV  
A
2
TV  
Input  
Input  
Input  
A
2
5
3
A
2
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL  
/
SAT  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
2
AUX  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
AUX  
6
2
1
AUX  
6
2
Game  
/
TV  
Game/TV  
1
AUX  
6
2
Game/  
TV  
4
4
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
CD  
9
Tape  
7
CD  
9
Tuner  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
CD  
9
8
Net/USB  
0
8
Net/USB  
0
8
Net/USB  
0
TV VOL  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
Phono  
+10  
/
D.TUN  
TV VOL  
Phono  
D.TUN  
6
+10  
Clear  
Clear  
+10  
Clear  
11  
12  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
-- --- 10  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
Input Selector  
Input Selector  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Macro  
Macro  
3
3
Zone  
3
2
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
Remote Mode  
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
CDR/MD/Dock  
CDR/MD/Dock  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Net/USB  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
Dimmer  
8
8
3
8
9
8
4
9
4
+
+
+
CH  
CH  
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
Disc  
Album  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
-
-
8
7
Prev  
CH  
Prev  
CH  
8
6
9
9
Prev  
CH  
4
8
Display  
Muting  
5
8
Display  
Muting  
5
6
Display  
Muting  
Playlist  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
8
Rec  
Random  
Playlist  
Rec  
Random  
7
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Listening Mode  
Surround  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Stereo  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Repeat  
Audio  
Direct  
Subtitle  
THX  
Play Mode  
All ST  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level  
-
Level+  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Test Tone  
CH Sel  
Level-  
Level+  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
Open/Close Video Off  
Audio Sel  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
L
Night  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
7
VCR  
VCR  
VCR  
RC-688M  
RC-688M  
RC-688M  
A [On], [Standby]  
A [On], [Standby]  
A [On], [Standby],TV [  
]*  
Set the satellite/cable receiver to  
Set the VCR to On or Standby.  
Set the TV to On or Standby.  
On or Standby.  
B Number buttons  
B Number buttons  
B Number buttons  
Enter numbers.  
Enter numbers.  
Enter numbers.  
C [Clear]  
C [CH +/–],TV CH [+]/[–]*  
C [Clear]  
Cancels functions.  
Select channels on the TV.  
Cancels functions.  
D [CH +/–]  
D [Prev CH]  
D [CH +/–]  
Selects channels on the VCR.  
Selects the previous channel.  
Selects satellite/cable channels.  
E [Prev CH]  
E [TV Input]*  
E [Prev CH]  
Selects the previous channel.  
Selects the TV’s external inputs.  
Selects the previous channel.  
F Rec [  
]
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*  
F [Guide]  
Starts recording.  
Adjust the TV’s volume.  
Displays the program guide.  
G Eject [  
]
G [Muting]  
G [ ], [  
]
Ejects the videocassette.  
Mutes the TV.  
Rewind and Fast forward.  
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [  
]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and  
Fast forward.  
Navigate menus on the TV.  
Navigate menus on the satel-  
lite/cable receiver.  
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[Menu]/  
[Enter]/[Return]  
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)  
are exclusively for controlling a TV  
and can be used at any time, regard-  
less of the currently selected remote  
controller mode.  
Navigate menus on the VCR.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Learning Commands  
Point the remote controllers at  
each other, about 2 to 6 inches  
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press  
and hold the button whose com-  
mand you want to learn until the  
Remote indicator flashes.  
3
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-  
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for  
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and  
then transmit the exact same command when its Play  
If the command is learned successfully,  
the Remote indicator flashes twice.  
[
] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.  
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate  
remote control code (page 132) but some buttons don’t  
work as expected.  
V O L U M E  
M U T  
T O N E  
T E S T  
C H S E L  
C
P R E T  
T U N E R  
D V D  
T
I N P U T  
M U L T I - C H  
P H O N O  
C T O R  
G R O U P  
R
M O D E  
S U  
D I S C  
T U N E R  
C
D
E R  
V I D E O - 2  
About 2 to 6  
I N P U T L E  
T P E  
D I M M  
V I D E O - 1  
Remote  
indicator  
S L E E P  
D V
inches (5–15 cm)  
P O W E R  
On  
Standby  
O
n
TV  
D
V
S
t
D
a
1
n
d
G
a
Input  
n
b
e
y
/T  
D
C
4
1
V
R
T
/
a
D
p
V
2
e
R
7
AUX1  
I
Phono  
C
+
5
B
T
10  
T
L
V
In  
-
-
/
u
S
A
/
-
n
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL  
/
SAT  
3
e
T
-
r
A
U
X
-
Net/USB 8  
1
0
p
u
1
2
t
Input  
6
Selector0  
C
D
DVD  
+
T
Macro  
9
V
1
D.TUN  
+
TV CH  
-
C
2
AUX 1  
5
3
1
H
2
Clear  
R
VCR  
emo  
T
V
1
2
te  
M
V
O
L
Cable  
3
AUX 2  
6
Game  
/
TV  
ode  
SAT  
CDR/MD/Dock  
CD  
Z
Net/USB  
o
n
e
3
4
Z
o
n
e
2
Receiver  
Tape/AM  
RC-688M  
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
Sleep  
P
TV VOL  
Phono  
+10  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Clear  
0
To learn more commands, repeat  
steps 2 and 3.  
Press any Remote Mode button when  
you’ve finished.  
-- --- 10  
11  
12  
/
4
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
1, 4  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Net/USB  
Dimmer  
Notes:  
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:  
Remote Mode, Macro [1], [2], [3], TV [Input], TV CH  
[+]/[–], TV VOL [ ]/[ ], [D.TUN], Light.  
+
CH  
Enter  
VOL  
Disc  
Album  
-
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to  
90 commands, although this will be less if commands  
that use a lot of memory are learned.  
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,  
controlling Integra/Onkyo CD players, cassette decks,  
and DVD players. However, they can learn new com-  
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-  
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller  
(see page 133).  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button for the mode in  
which you want to use the com-  
mand, press the [On] button.  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
1
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat  
this procedure.  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can  
be learned.  
On  
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all  
learned commands will be lost and will have to be  
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other  
remote controllers.  
Press the button you want to  
learn the new command.  
2
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Using Macros  
Press the buttons whose actions  
you want to program into the  
macro in the order you want them  
performed.  
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press the following buttons:  
[ON], [CD] Input Selector, [CD]  
Remote Mode, Play [ ].  
2
You can program the remote controller’s Macro buttons  
to perform a sequence of remote control actions.  
Example:  
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-  
ing actions:  
1. Press the [Receiver] Remote Mode button to select  
the Receiver remote controller mode.  
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the AV receiver.  
3. Press the [CD] Input Selector button to select the  
CD input source.  
4. Press the [CD] Remote Mode button to select the  
CD remote controller mode.  
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the  
When you’ve finished, press the  
Macro button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If you enter eight commands, the pro-  
cess will finish automatically.  
3
Macro  
2
1
3
CD player.  
Note:  
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are  
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work  
properly and will have to be made again.  
You can program a Macro button so that all five actions  
are performed with just one button press.  
Making Macros  
Running Macros  
Each Macro button can store one macro, and each macro  
can contain up to eight commands.  
Press the Macro [1], [2], or [3]  
button.  
Macro  
1
2
3
Remote  
The commands in the macro are trans-  
mitted in the order in which they were  
programmed. Keep the remote control-  
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all  
of the commands have been transmit-  
ted.  
indicator  
On  
Standby  
TV  
Input  
DVD  
1
VCR  
/
DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
AUX 1  
5
3
+
TV CH  
-
AUX 2  
6
Game/TV  
4
Tape  
7
Tuner  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
Phono  
Net/USB  
D.TUN  
Macros can be run at any time, regard-  
less of the current remote controller  
mode.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
Clear  
0
11  
12  
Macro  
1, 2, 3  
Input Selector  
Macro  
Zone  
3
2
1
2
3
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Zone  
CDR/MD/Dock  
Remote  
Mode  
TV  
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
Sleep  
Receiver  
Dimmer  
Deleting Macros  
While holding down the  
1
[Receiver] Remote Mode button,  
press the Macro button whose  
macro you want to delete.  
While holding down the Remote  
Mode button of the remote con-  
troller mode you want to use at  
the start of the macro, press  
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
Receiver  
1
Remote Mode  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
Macro  
2
CDR/MD/Dock  
1
3
Cable  
SAT  
Net/USB  
Receiver  
Tape/AMP  
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press and hold the [Receiver]  
Remote Mode button, and then press  
Macro button [1], [2], or [3].  
Press the Macro button again.  
2
Macro  
1
2
3
Macro  
2
1
3
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a  
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact the dealer from whom you purchased  
this unit.  
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to  
unmute the AV receiver (page 83).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the Phones  
jack, no sound is output by the main room speakers  
(page 84).  
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source  
component. On some game consoles, such as those  
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.  
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button  
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use  
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 42).  
• Check the speaker settings (pages 101–106).  
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it  
to Auto (page 85).  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting  
the AV receiver before contacting the dealer from  
whom you purchased this unit.  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,  
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]  
button, press the [Standby/On] button.“Clearwill  
appear on the display and the AV receiver will  
enter Standby mode.  
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an  
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,  
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.  
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your  
radio presets and custom settings.  
Only the front speakers produce sound  
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R  
(page 97).  
Power  
Can’t turn on the AV receiver  
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall  
outlet properly.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
Only the center speaker produces sound  
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby  
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono  
speaker.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C  
(page 97).  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5  
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.  
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned  
on  
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.  
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-  
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,  
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-  
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord  
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver  
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the  
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input  
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the  
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and  
contact the dealer from whom you purchased this unit.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
The surround speakers produce no sound  
the surround speakers produce no sound.  
• Depending on the source and the current listening  
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-  
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 88).  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
Audio  
The center speaker produces no sound  
speaker produces no sound.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R  
(page 97).  
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet  
selector (page 52).  
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected  
(page 85).  
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 29).  
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is  
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the  
metal part of each speaker terminal.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
The surround back speakers produce no sound  
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-  
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 88).  
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround  
back speakers with some sources.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the  
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-  
round back speakers produce no sound (page 124).  
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.  
• Check the volume (page 62). The AV receiver is  
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide  
volume range for precise adjustment.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting—Continued  
The subwoofer produces no sound  
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed  
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency  
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-  
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you  
may hear noise.  
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE  
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 101).  
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound  
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are  
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the  
source component is connected to an analog input.  
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an  
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-  
nals, sound may not be output immediately.  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source  
component. On some game consoles, such as those  
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button  
on your DVD player’s remote controller.  
Video  
There’s no picture  
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 29).  
nected.  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
• If your TV is connected to an HDMI output, set the  
HDMI Monitor setting to Main or Sub (page 48), and  
select “- - -” in the “HDMI Input Setup” on page 50 to  
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENTVIDEO  
MONITOR OUT 1 or COMPONENT VIDEO MON-  
ITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, set the HDMI Monitor  
setting to No (page 48), and select “- - -” in the “Com-  
ponent Video Input Setup” on page 51 to watch com-  
posite video and S-Video sources.  
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the  
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-  
round back speakers produce no sound (page 124).  
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set  
(page 111).  
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been  
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has  
been adjusted (pages 83 and 105), the maximum vol-  
ume may be reduced.  
Noise can be heard  
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power  
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio  
performance, so don’t use them.  
• If the video source is connected to a component video  
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 1, COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2/ZONE 2 OUT, HDMI  
OUT MAIN, or HDMI OUT SUB (page 30).  
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,  
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT MAIN  
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 86).  
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 34).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to  
the input selector (page 53).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected  
(page 85).  
There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the  
Resolution setting is set to anything other than  
Through (page 48), no video is output by the HDMI  
OUT.  
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not  
support the current video resolution and you need to  
select another resolution on your DVD player.  
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.  
About DTS signals  
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,  
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player  
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-  
function.  
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-  
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-  
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to  
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or  
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your  
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not  
switch formats immediately, you may not hear any-  
thing, in which case you should stop your player for  
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.  
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback  
DTS material properly even though your player is con-  
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is  
The onscreen menus don’t appear  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
The picture is distorted  
• On non-North American models, specify the TV sys-  
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on  
page 60.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that  
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot  
be learned, especially those that contain several  
instructions.  
Tuner  
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers  
light up  
• Relocate your antenna.  
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-  
puter.  
Recording  
Can’t record  
• Listen to the station in mono (page 63).  
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is  
selected.  
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV  
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs  
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or  
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).  
Music Server and Internet Radio  
Remote Controller  
Can’t access the server or Internet radio  
• Check the network connection between the AV  
receiver and your router or switch.  
The remote controller doesn’t work  
rect polarity (page 15).  
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction  
remote control sensor (page 15).  
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly  
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.  
• Make sure the server is up and running and compatible  
with the AV receiver (page 116).  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 16).  
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control  
code (page 132).  
• Check the Network settings (page 122).  
Playback stops while listening to music files on  
the server  
• Make sure your server is compatible with the AV  
Can’t control other components  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 16).  
receiver (page 116).  
• If you download or copy large files on your computer,  
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused  
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a  
dedicated server.  
• If you’ve connected an  
-capable Onkyo MD  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE  
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN  
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you  
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,  
respectively (page 52).  
• If the server is serving large music files to several net-  
worked devices simultaneously, the network may  
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.  
Reduce the number of playback devices on the net-  
work, upgrade your network, or use a switch instead  
of a hub.  
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If  
more than one code is listed, try each one.  
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function  
to learn the commands of the other component’s  
remote controller (page 135).  
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web  
browser  
• If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always  
allocate the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if  
you find that you can’t connect to a server or Internet  
radio station, recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on  
Network screen.  
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not  
work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s con-  
nected via  
, point the remote controller at the AV  
receiver. Be sure to enter the appropriate remote con-  
• To control an Integra/Onkyo component that’s not  
• Check the Network settings (page 122).  
connected via  
, or another manufacturer’s compo-  
nent, point the remote controller at that component. Be  
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(page 132).  
Can’t learn commands from another remote  
controller  
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-  
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at  
each other.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
USB Mass Storage Device Playback  
Can’t access the music files on a USB device  
• Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.  
• The AV receiver supports USB devices that support  
the USB mass storage device class. However, play-  
back may not be possible with some USB devices even  
if they conform to the USB mass storage device class.  
Others  
The sound changes when I connect my head-  
phones  
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, or Direct, in which case it stays the same.  
How do I change the language of a multiplex  
source  
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-  
The  
functions don’t work  
• To use  
, you must make an  
connection and an  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-  
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-  
tally (page 45).  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the  
don’t work.  
functions  
Components connected to the AV receiver’s AC  
outlets don’t turn on or off when the AV receiver  
is set to On or Standby  
• When the HDMI Control setting is set to Enable  
(page 114), the AC outlets are on all the time regard-  
less of whether the AV receiver is set to On or Standby,  
or Ready mode in this case, so any components con-  
nected to them cannot be turned on or off automati-  
cally.  
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-  
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,  
severe interference, noise from an external source, or  
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely  
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back  
in again.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by  
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important  
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-  
rectly.  
Set the AV receiver to Standby before disconnecting  
the power cord from the wall outlet.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
General  
Rated Output Power  
Power Supply  
North American:  
North American:  
Asian & Oceania:  
Power Consumption  
North American:  
Asian & Oceania:  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
AC 120 V, 60Hz  
AC 220-240 V, 50Hz  
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven from 20Hz to 20kHz, with a  
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)  
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)  
180 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)  
9.8 A  
1000 W  
435 × 194 × 455 mm  
17-1/8"  
24.3 kg  
×
7-5/8"  
×
17-7/8"  
Weight  
Asian & Oceania:  
53.6 lbs.  
7 ch × 220 W at 6 ohms, 1kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)  
Maximum Output Power  
Video Input  
HDMI  
Component  
Composite  
7 ch × 280 W at 6 ohms, 1kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4  
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3  
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,  
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2  
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,  
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2  
Dynamic Power  
400 W (3, Front)  
300 W (4, Front)  
180 W (8, Front)  
THD (Total Harmonic  
Distortion)  
Damping Factor  
S-Video  
0.05% (1 Vrms)  
60 (Front, 1kHz, 8)  
Input Sensitivity and  
Impedance  
Video Output  
HDMI  
Component  
Composite  
200 mV/ 47 k(LINE)  
2.5 mV/47 k(PHONO MM)  
OUT (MAIN), OUT (SUB)  
MONITOR OUT 1, MONITOR OUT 2  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT  
Output Level and  
Impedance  
Phono Overload  
Frequency Response  
Tone Control  
200 mV/ 470 (REC OUT)  
70 mV (MM 1kHz, 0.5%)  
5Hz–100kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)  
10 dB, 20Hz (BASS)  
10 dB, 20kHz (TREBLE)  
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)  
S-Video  
Audio Inputs  
Digital Inputs  
COAXIAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3,  
OPTICAL IN 1, IN 2, IN 3 (Front)  
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,  
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH  
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,  
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
Speaker Impedance  
Analog Inputs  
4–16or 6–16Ω  
Multichannel Inputs  
7.1 ch  
Video Section  
Audio Outputs  
Digital Output  
Analog Outputs  
Input Sensitivity/Output  
Level and Impedance  
1 Vp-p /75(Component and S-VideoY)  
0.7 Vp-p /75(Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)  
0.28 Vp-p /75(S-Video C)  
OPTICAL (OUT)  
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,  
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR  
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)  
1 Vp-p /75(Composite)  
Multichannel Pre  
Outputs  
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
Speaker Outputs  
Component Video  
Frequency Response  
7
1
5Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB  
MAIN (FL, FR, C, SL, SR, SBL, SBR),  
ZONE2 (L, R)  
Tuner Section  
Phones  
PHONES  
FM  
Control Terminal  
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
Asian & Oceania:  
MIC  
Yes  
87.5MHz– 107.9MHz  
87.5MHz– 108.0MHz, RDS  
RS232  
1
Ethernet  
1
AM  
IR Input/Output  
12 V Trigger Out  
USB  
2/1  
3
1
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
Asian & Oceania:  
530kHz–1710kHz  
522kHz–1611kHz  
Digital Tuner  
North American:  
XM, SIRIUS, HD RADIO  
40  
Specifications and features are subject to change without  
notice.  
Preset Channel  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memo  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION  
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integrahometheater.com  
En  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO CORPORATION  
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8163  
I0801-2  
SN 29344544A  
(C) Copyright 2008 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 3 4 4 5 4 4 A *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Ingersoll Rand Heat Pump LM2203AX User Manual
Jeep Motorized Toy Car N9356 User Manual
JVC Camcorder TK C9200E User Manual
Kambrook Clock Radio KCR90 User Manual
KEF Audio Speaker System T100SYSTEM User Manual
Kenmore Washer 1102952 User Manual
Kenmore Washer MFL67360428 User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System KDC X493 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KECD805E User Manual
KitchenAid Microwave Oven KHMS105E User Manual